TW527798B - A scaleable low-latency switch for usage in an interconnect structure - Google Patents
A scaleable low-latency switch for usage in an interconnect structure Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- TW527798B TW527798B TW087112178A TW87112178A TW527798B TW 527798 B TW527798 B TW 527798B TW 087112178 A TW087112178 A TW 087112178A TW 87112178 A TW87112178 A TW 87112178A TW 527798 B TW527798 B TW 527798B
- Authority
- TW
- Taiwan
- Prior art keywords
- message
- node
- layer
- nodes
- switch
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 109
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 claims description 479
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 claims description 110
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 claims description 42
- 230000002079 cooperative effect Effects 0.000 claims description 39
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 claims description 34
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 claims description 20
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 claims description 19
- 230000003139 buffering effect Effects 0.000 claims description 7
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 claims description 7
- 235000014676 Phragmites communis Nutrition 0.000 claims description 4
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 claims description 4
- 239000002356 single layer Substances 0.000 claims description 3
- 238000010276 construction Methods 0.000 claims description 2
- 230000008520 organization Effects 0.000 claims 15
- 241000689006 Syntrophorhabdaceae Species 0.000 claims 3
- PCTMTFRHKVHKIS-BMFZQQSSSA-N (1s,3r,4e,6e,8e,10e,12e,14e,16e,18s,19r,20r,21s,25r,27r,30r,31r,33s,35r,37s,38r)-3-[(2r,3s,4s,5s,6r)-4-amino-3,5-dihydroxy-6-methyloxan-2-yl]oxy-19,25,27,30,31,33,35,37-octahydroxy-18,20,21-trimethyl-23-oxo-22,39-dioxabicyclo[33.3.1]nonatriaconta-4,6,8,10 Chemical compound C1C=C2C[C@@H](OS(O)(=O)=O)CC[C@]2(C)[C@@H]2[C@@H]1[C@@H]1CC[C@H]([C@H](C)CCCC(C)C)[C@@]1(C)CC2.O[C@H]1[C@@H](N)[C@H](O)[C@@H](C)O[C@H]1O[C@H]1/C=C/C=C/C=C/C=C/C=C/C=C/C=C/[C@H](C)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](C)[C@H](C)OC(=O)C[C@H](O)C[C@H](O)CC[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)C[C@H](O)C[C@](O)(C[C@H](O)[C@H]2C(O)=O)O[C@H]2C1 PCTMTFRHKVHKIS-BMFZQQSSSA-N 0.000 claims 1
- 241000282376 Panthera tigris Species 0.000 claims 1
- 238000012856 packing Methods 0.000 claims 1
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 abstract description 38
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 abstract description 19
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 abstract description 17
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 abstract description 11
- 235000002595 Solanum tuberosum Nutrition 0.000 abstract description 2
- 244000061456 Solanum tuberosum Species 0.000 abstract description 2
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 51
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 43
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 17
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 17
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 15
- 239000000835 fiber Substances 0.000 description 12
- 239000013307 optical fiber Substances 0.000 description 12
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 11
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 11
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 description 9
- 230000033228 biological regulation Effects 0.000 description 9
- 230000003111 delayed effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 235000012431 wafers Nutrition 0.000 description 6
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000015654 memory Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000007639 printing Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 5
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 238000010521 absorption reaction Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000011229 interlayer Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 description 4
- 235000015170 shellfish Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000006399 behavior Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000014759 maintenance of location Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000000717 retained effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000002776 aggregation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004220 aggregation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000008030 elimination Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000003379 elimination reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000003362 replicative effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004904 shortening Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 241000490494 Arabis Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000018185 Betula X alpestris Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 235000018212 Betula X uliginosa Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 241000238631 Hexapoda Species 0.000 description 1
- QSNQXZYQEIKDPU-UHFFFAOYSA-N [Li].[Fe] Chemical compound [Li].[Fe] QSNQXZYQEIKDPU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000001174 ascending effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005266 casting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000295 complement effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012790 confirmation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000013078 crystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007812 deficiency Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001934 delay Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009977 dual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005611 electricity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002349 favourable effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007689 inspection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002789 length control Methods 0.000 description 1
- GQYHUHYESMUTHG-UHFFFAOYSA-N lithium niobate Chemical compound [Li+].[O-][Nb](=O)=O GQYHUHYESMUTHG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003550 marker Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000008267 milk Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000004080 milk Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 235000013336 milk Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000004806 packaging method and process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000750 progressive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008929 regeneration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011069 regeneration method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000010076 replication Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007619 statistical method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007306 turnover Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002699 waste material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002023 wood Substances 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L12/00—Data switching networks
- H04L12/54—Store-and-forward switching systems
- H04L12/56—Packet switching systems
- H04L12/5601—Transfer mode dependent, e.g. ATM
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L49/00—Packet switching elements
- H04L49/15—Interconnection of switching modules
- H04L49/1553—Interconnection of ATM switching modules, e.g. ATM switching fabrics
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L49/00—Packet switching elements
- H04L49/20—Support for services
- H04L49/201—Multicast operation; Broadcast operation
- H04L49/203—ATM switching fabrics with multicast or broadcast capabilities
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L49/00—Packet switching elements
- H04L49/25—Routing or path finding in a switch fabric
- H04L49/256—Routing or path finding in ATM switching fabrics
- H04L49/257—Cut-through or wormhole routing
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L49/00—Packet switching elements
- H04L49/35—Switches specially adapted for specific applications
- H04L49/351—Switches specially adapted for specific applications for local area network [LAN], e.g. Ethernet switches
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L12/00—Data switching networks
- H04L12/54—Store-and-forward switching systems
- H04L12/56—Packet switching systems
- H04L12/5601—Transfer mode dependent, e.g. ATM
- H04L2012/5638—Services, e.g. multimedia, GOS, QOS
- H04L2012/5646—Cell characteristics, e.g. loss, delay, jitter, sequence integrity
- H04L2012/5651—Priority, marking, classes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L12/00—Data switching networks
- H04L12/54—Store-and-forward switching systems
- H04L12/56—Packet switching systems
- H04L12/5601—Transfer mode dependent, e.g. ATM
- H04L2012/5638—Services, e.g. multimedia, GOS, QOS
- H04L2012/5665—Interaction of ATM with other protocols
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L12/00—Data switching networks
- H04L12/54—Store-and-forward switching systems
- H04L12/56—Packet switching systems
- H04L12/5601—Transfer mode dependent, e.g. ATM
- H04L2012/5678—Traffic aspects, e.g. arbitration, load balancing, smoothing, buffer management
- H04L2012/5681—Buffer or queue management
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Data Exchanges In Wide-Area Networks (AREA)
- Multi Processors (AREA)
Abstract
Description
527798 A7 _______ B7 五、發明説明() 本案係關於計算與通信系統之互連結構,尤其,本案 係有關於一種用於多層互連結構之可縮放低潛候期開關。 在電腦科學領域裡長久以來重要而未解決的問題爲缺 乏一個可縮放低潛候期之互連結構,其在滿載情況下仍能 承受高輸貫率(throughout)(高橫面頻寬)。現存之互連設 計如 banyon, omega及fat-tree網路,多層柵格(grid), 凸圓狀(torus)及超立方體網路在不同程度上皆缺乏無限縮 放的功能及支援通訊載荷時之低潛候期及高輸貫率。這些 網路的幾何形狀係由十九世紀的數學家及更早的幾何學家 所發展而成,卻從未企圖支援一訊息發送的方法。 吾人所需者爲一互連結構及一合適的開關以用於形成 實際可無限縮放並支援低潛候期及高輸貫率之互連結構。 具有這些優點特性的一互連結構及開關在許多電子設 計環境應用範籌包括超級電腦網路及如區域網路(LAN)/網 際網路開關架構及電話開關架構之網路開關架構環境中是 有用的。 : 各種電子設計環境的目的是不同的。例如,設計超級 電腦的主要目的係在於低潛候期。相較之下,區域網路/ 網際網路開關架構設計的主要目的卻在於可縮放性,而非 潛候期。另外,電話中央辦公室開關的主要目的在於高可 縮放性及低成本,而在潛候期及頻寬的考量卻較之爲少。 用於超級電腦設計之開關係使用昂貴矽製造技術來製 造。設計參數經特殊定義且一成不變地遍及於超級電腦。 尤其字元大小、位址結構、尺寸和容量在超級電腦中一般 ___2 本紙張尺度追中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X 297公釐) (誚先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)527798 A7 _______ B7 V. Description of the Invention () This case is about the interconnection structure of computing and communication systems. In particular, this case is about a scalable low-latency switch for a multilayer interconnection structure. A long-standing and unresolved problem in the field of computer science is the lack of a scalable low-latency interconnect structure that can still withstand high throughput (high cross-bandwidth) at full load. Existing interconnect designs such as the banyon, omega, and fat-tree networks, multi-layer grids, torus, and hypercube networks lack the ability to infinitely scale and support communication loads to varying degrees. Low latency and high turnover rate. The geometry of these networks was developed by 19th-century mathematicians and earlier geographers, but never attempted to support a method of sending messages. What we need is an interconnect structure and a suitable switch for forming an interconnect structure that is practically infinitely scalable and supports low latency and high throughput. An interconnect structure and switch having these advantages are used in many electronic design environment applications including super computer networks and network switch architecture environments such as LAN / Internet switch architecture and telephone switch architecture. useful. : The purpose of various electronic design environments is different. For example, the main purpose of designing a supercomputer is low latency. In contrast, the main purpose of LAN / Internet switch architecture design is scalability, not latency. In addition, the main purpose of the telephone central office switch is high scalability and low cost, but the consideration of latency and bandwidth is less. Open relationships for supercomputer design are made using expensive silicon manufacturing technology. The design parameters are specially defined and consistently applied to supercomputers. In particular, the character size, address structure, size, and capacity are generally in a supercomputer. ___2 This paper follows the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm) (诮 Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)
527798 A7 ___^ B7 五、發明説明() 是不變的。單一編譯器之原理設計及作業系統之定義和需 求組一般用於超級電腦中。同樣地,超級電腦系統包含單 一定義之作業速度及電壓。超級電腦利用相容的元件,記 憶體、處理器、電源供應器及其他類似者。 雖然網路規模的變化很大,一超級電腦之設計一般具 有比區域網路(LAN)/網際網路爲小的最大規模。一超級電 腦的設計通常具有從數百個到幾千個瑋(ports)的範圍大 小,而一網路容量的範圍卻有數百到數千個或更多的埠。 一超級電腦系統藉由多個相同的堆疊積體電路的使用而使 用具高度平行的開關設計。通常,提供超級電腦網路的節 點於只有少數節點製作於電路板上的單一積體電路晶片 上。節點的互連係以多條昂賣的高速電纜來連接。超級電 腦的設計平行延伸至位址及控制方面的問題和封裝以達成 減少潛候期及增加每個埠的頻寬。 與超級電腦開關實施成對比,用於一網路設計如LAN/ 網際網路設計之開關一般是利用可能具有不同設計參數的 多個積體電路。一般而言,小型網路之設計參數實質上是 與大型網路之設計參數不同的。例如,大型網路有時使用 一扭曲立方或二次元的設計。具有數十萬個埠之超大型網 路通常使用三次元或四次元拓樸,其係由互連或串接多個 開關電路至超大型開關之meta -拓樸所形成。需要開關電 路的不同實施以有效構築具有不同meta-拓樸之LAN/網 際網路’尤其供應適合之輸入和輸出訊號時序。網路位元 速率通常比超級電腦之位元速率來得慢且大爲不同。例 __3_ 本紙張尺度州中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)527798 A7 ___ ^ B7 5. The description of the invention () is unchanged. The principle design of a single compiler and the definition and requirements of the operating system are generally used in supercomputers. Similarly, supercomputer systems include a single defined operating speed and voltage. Supercomputers use compatible components, memory, processors, power supplies, and the like. Although the size of the network varies greatly, a supercomputer is generally designed to have a smaller maximum size than a local area network (LAN) / Internet. The design of a supercomputer usually has a size ranging from hundreds to thousands of ports, while a network capacity ranges from hundreds to thousands or more ports. A supercomputer system uses a highly parallel switch design with the use of multiple identical stacked integrated circuits. Generally, the nodes providing a supercomputer network are on a single integrated circuit chip with only a few nodes fabricated on the circuit board. The nodes are interconnected by a number of high-speed cables sold. The supercomputer design extends to address and control issues and packaging in parallel to achieve reduced latency and increased bandwidth per port. In contrast to the implementation of supercomputer switches, switches used in a network design such as LAN / Internet design typically utilize multiple integrated circuits that may have different design parameters. Generally speaking, the design parameters of small networks are essentially different from the design parameters of large networks. For example, large networks sometimes use a twisted cubic or quadratic design. Ultra-large networks with hundreds of thousands of ports usually use a three-dimensional or four-dimensional topology, which is formed by interconnecting or cascading multiple switch circuits to a meta-topology of an ultra-large switch. Different implementations of switching circuits are needed to effectively build a LAN / Internet with different meta-topologies, and in particular to provide suitable input and output signal timing. Network bit rates are usually slower and significantly different than the bit rates of supercomputers. Example __3_ State of Chinese Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm) of this paper size (read the precautions on the back before filling this page)
527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明( 如,乙太網路(ethernet)使用10 Mbit/s速率。一記號環網 路(token ring)具有12 Mbit/s的速率。一快速乙太網路達 到 100 Mbit/s 的速率以及 ATM 達到 25 Mbit/s 至 62 2 Mbit/s 的速率。 傳統開關技術在互連結構技術之支援有許多的缺失。 首先,沒有開關架構或技術可以合理價格來支援超過12 至24個埠。例如,八個埠之記號環網路開關的價格約爲 $10,000。八至十六個埠之乙太網路開關的價格範圍爲 $4,000 Μ $1 0,000 〇 互連開關技術之第二缺失爲單一開關設計無法支援多 重不同聯繫方法。接腳限制的設計容易只支援具有一小的 封包長度如ATM的聯繫方法。不同之封包大小直接影響 積體電路晶片設計,使得封包大小的廣泛差異性導致在設 計開關規格上有很大的不同性。例如,一開關至少有一次 爲積體電路開關中的每個璋緩衝最大封包尺寸之整個 長度。因此,所定義之ATM封包大小爲53 bytes,使得 ATM設計的小型有效載荷會引起積體電路中閘極的有效 利用。乙太網路的封包大小爲有變化的且範圍可達到約 2Kbytes,其需要許多聞極以緩衝一訊息。同樣地,記號 環網路的封包大小範圍可達到約4 Kbytes,且光纖通道大 小實際上沒有限制,其使用大型電路面積作訊息之緩衝。 吾人所需者爲用於區域網路使用之一般開關電路,更 需要的是用於建造提供IEEE網路規格之網路的一普通開 關電路。 4 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) (謂先閱讀背面之注^11^再填寫本頁) - 訂 527798 Α7 Β7 五、發明説明() (掮先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 一非常有用的互連結構對所有類型之電腦,網路和使 用一種根據藉由互連結構通訊之訊息的時序和位置之資料 流通技術之聯絡系統有用。開關控制分佈於此結構中的多 個節點,而可避免提供一整體控制功能以及複雜邏輯結構 之管理控制裝置。該互連結構係以一”偏離”或”燙手山芋” 系統操作,其中可減少在每一節點上的處理和儲存。整體 控制裝置的去除和在節點的緩衝大大地減少該互連結構中 的控制和邏輯結構的數量,簡化整個控制元件和網路互連 元件以及改善訊息聯繫之速度效能。 可縮放低潛候期開關延伸了互連結構之使用和好處且 包括伴隨一新穎訊息發送方法之一新穎結構組以避免先前 存在網路受到限制。當該互連結構尺寸趨近無限時,使用 可縮放低潛候期開關之互連結構的簡單實施例之輸貫量可 多出2〇%。飛行時間(潛候期)一般不會超過標頭(header) 進入網路實耗時間的兩倍,甚至當該互連結構處於完全負 載的情況。使用可縮放低潛候期開關之互連結構的另一實 施例,稱爲”平坦潛候期互連結構”,在每個節點具有二或 多個向下路徑,且當規模趨近無限時改善其輸貫量超出 40%。 根據本發明之一構想,可縮放低潛候期開關設計符合 了在多重互連設計種類之高度採取攻勢之目的。該可縮放 低潛候期開關在廣大的市場中滿足許多不同積體電路的佈 局以用於多重設計種類。 該可縮放低潛候期開關是由許多非常簡單的控制單元 5527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (eg, Ethernet uses 10 Mbit / s rate. A token ring network has a rate of 12 Mbit / s. A fast Ethernet network reaches 100 Mbit The speed of A / s and the speed of ATM reaching 25 Mbit / s to 62 2 Mbit / s. There are many gaps in the support of traditional switch technology in the interconnect structure technology. First of all, no switch architecture or technology can support more than 12 to a reasonable price. 24 ports. For example, an eight-port marker ring network switch costs about $ 10,000. An eight- to sixteen-port Ethernet switch price range is $ 4,000. $ 2,000 The second deficiency in interconnect switch technology Designing for a single switch cannot support multiple different contact methods. Pin-constrained designs easily support only contact methods with a small packet length, such as ATM. Different packet sizes directly affect the design of integrated circuit chip, making a wide range of packet sizes As a result, there is a large difference in the design of the switch specifications. For example, a switch buffers the entire maximum packet size for each of the integrated circuit switches at least once. Therefore, the defined ATM packet size is 53 bytes, so that the small payload of the ATM design will cause the effective use of the gate in the integrated circuit. The packet size of the Ethernet is variable and the range can reach about 2Kbytes It requires a lot of sniffers to buffer a message. Similarly, the packet size range of the token ring network can reach about 4 Kbytes, and the size of the fiber channel is virtually unlimited. It uses a large circuit area for message buffering. This is a general switching circuit for local area network use, and more common is a general switching circuit used to build a network that provides IEEE network specifications. 4 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297) (%) (That is, read the note on the back ^ 11 ^ before filling out this page)-Order 527798 Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention () (掮 Read the notes on the back before filling out this page) A very useful interconnect structure for all Types of computers, networks, and contact systems that use a data flow technology based on the timing and location of messages communicated through interconnected structures. Switch control distribution The multiple nodes in this structure can avoid the provision of an overall control function and a management and control device with a complex logical structure. The interconnected structure is operated with a "deviation" or "hot potato" system, which can reduce the number of nodes at each node Processing and storage. The removal of the overall control device and the buffering at the nodes greatly reduce the number of control and logical structures in the interconnect structure, simplify the entire control element and network interconnect elements, and improve the speed performance of the information connection. Scalable low-latency switches extend the use and benefits of interconnect structures and include a novel set of structures that accompany a novel message sending method to avoid the limitations of previously existing networks. As the size of the interconnect structure approaches infinity, the throughput of a simple embodiment of an interconnect structure using a scalable low-latency switch can be 20% more. The flight time (latency) generally does not exceed twice the time it takes for the header to enter the network, even when the interconnect is under full load. Another embodiment of an interconnect structure using a scalable low latency switch, called a "flat latency interconnect structure", has two or more downward paths at each node, and when the scale approaches infinite Improve its throughput by more than 40%. According to one idea of the present invention, the scalable low-latency switch design meets the purpose of taking an offensive at the height of multiple interconnect design types. This scalable low-latency switch meets the layout of many different integrated circuits in multiple markets for multiple design variants. The scalable low latency switch is made up of many very simple control units 5
尺度ϋί7國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X 297公瘦T 527798 A7 ___ B7 五、發明説明() (許先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) (節點)所組成。該控制單元排列成陣列方式。在一陣列中 之控制單元數目爲一設計參數,一般範圍爲64至1024且 通常爲二的乘方。該陣列排列成層和行。一般行數的範圍 爲4至20或更多。當每一陣列包含W個控制單元,層數 一般爲J+1。根據決定開關尺寸,效能和種類之多重設計 參數而設計該可縮放低潛候期開關。具有數十萬個控制單 元之開關佈局於單一晶片中,使得開關之有用尺寸受到接 腳數的限制,而不是網路規模。 該可縮放低潛候期開關的多重設計參數決定了用於建 構開關之一電路佈局。除了每一陣列之控制單元數目和陣 列總數,可作其他設計的選擇。在一基本設計中,該控制 單元具有兩個資料輸入埠和兩個資料輸出埠。更複雜的設 計如一 ”配對單元”的設計,其結合基本單元之元件以形成 較大型之控制單元。該較大型之控制單元形成更複雜的節 點。如”配對單元”設計之混合單元的好處爲具有較低之整 個潛候期和減少潛候期之差異性。與該基本設計相較之 下,該混合單元可以稱爲”平坦潛候期”開關,此乃因潛候 期差異性的減少。該配對單元設計包括比兩個單獨單元更 多的閘極,但因爲平坦糟候期可適用於超級電腦和作爲如 Gigabit乙太網路和ATM開關之快速網路的開關結構。Standards: 7 national standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210X 297 male thin T 527798 A7 ___ B7) V. Description of the invention () (Xu first read the notes on the back before filling this page) (node). The control unit is arranged in Array mode. The number of control units in an array is a design parameter, generally ranging from 64 to 1024 and usually a power of two. The array is arranged in layers and rows. The general number of rows is 4 to 20 or more. When each array contains W control units, the number of layers is generally J + 1. The scalable low-latency switch is designed according to multiple design parameters that determine switch size, performance, and type. Switches with hundreds of thousands of control units The layout in a single chip makes the useful size of the switch limited by the number of pins, not the size of the network. The multiple design parameters of this scalable low-latency switch determine the circuit layout used to construct the switch. Except for each The number of array control units and the total number of arrays can be selected for other designs. In a basic design, the control unit has two data input ports and two data output ports. Miscellaneous design is a "paired unit" design, which combines the elements of the basic unit to form a larger control unit. The larger control unit forms more complex nodes. For example, the advantages of the mixed unit designed by "paired unit" are to have Lower overall latency and reduced latency differences. Compared to this basic design, the hybrid unit can be referred to as a "flat latency" switch due to reduced latency differences. This paired unit design includes more gates than two separate units, but because of the flattening period, it can be applied to supercomputers and switch structures that are fast networks such as Gigabit Ethernet and ATM switches.
設計參數更包括時序類型,其包括一基本時序圖和管 線邏輯圖。該管線邏輯在網路中”起漣波”,因此被稱爲起 漣波型設計。起漣波型管線邏輯以較少時脈週期藉由網路 傳輸訊息。相較之下,該基本時序設計以最快可能之I/O 6 本紙張尺度適力]中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 527798 A7 — B7 五、發明説明() 速率操作一積體電路晶片。 訊息一般是由頂層(第L層)進入該互連結構之陣列且 由底層(第〇層)離開。訊息如”蟲蛀之孔”穿過晶片中之控 制單元,資料位元由左至右和由上至下而移動。在一簡單 時序圖中,標頭位元在二段時間(二個時脈週期)移動於一 既定層中單元之間,且在一短時間移動於不同層之節點之 間。有效載荷位元’像標頭位元一樣,使用二個短時間在 相同層中由一單元移至另一單元,且瞬間有效地由一層向 下移動至另一層。在起漣波型時序圖中標頭和有效載荷位 元只使用一短時間於既定層中節點之間移動。有效載荷位 元瞬間有效地由一層向下通過另一層。在該配對單元設計 中,只有當偏離時,訊息才會在既定層之單元之間移動。 因此,未偏離之訊息具有直接由輸入接腳移動至輸出接腳 之有效載荷位元。使用可使訊息如蟲蛀之孔穿過之時序圖 而達到接腳與接腳的連結。 經沪部中决i?.-^-XJh-Τ消抡合作私卬^ (許先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 該開關之一些實施例包括一多元播送(multicasting)的 選擇,其中可執行一對所有或一對多的訊息傳播。以使用 多元播送選擇,任何輸入埠可選擇地傳送訊息至許多或所 有輸出埠。該訊息在開關中被複製,以每個輸出埠產生一 副本。多元播送功能適合於ATM和LAN/WAN開關以及 超級電腦。多元播送以直進模式進行,其使用另一控制線 以增加約20%至3 0%之積體電路邏輯。一多元播送開關結 合起漣波型邏輯會增加時序的複雜性,特別當設計包括了 平坦潛候期操作。 7 本紙張尺度ϋ中國國家標率(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明() (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 在一實際實施中,一具有互連結構拓樸之矽開關受到 接腳限制。換句話說,製造該開關所需之邏輯閘極之最小 數目實質上比所得之數目來得小。當積體電路晶片尺寸增 加時,面積以平方增加而周長以線性增加。因此,一較大 型積體電路晶片具有比I/O接腳數所保證之閘極來得多。 根據本發明之一些實施例,使用過多邏輯閘極以達到低潛 候期。根據本發明之其他實施例,2Kbytes或更多之LAN 訊息包括許多動態先入先出(FIFO )緩衝器以消耗過多 邏輯閘極。The design parameters also include the timing type, which includes a basic timing diagram and a pipeline logic diagram. This pipeline logic “ripples” in the network, so it is called a ripple type design. Ripple-type pipeline logic transmits messages over the network in fewer clock cycles. In contrast, the basic timing design is based on the fastest possible I / O 6 paper size] Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm) 527798 A7 — B7 V. Description of the invention () Speed operation An integrated circuit chip. Messages generally enter the array of interconnect structures from the top (Layer L) and leave from the bottom (Layer 0). Messages such as "worm holes" pass through the control unit in the chip, and the data bits move from left to right and from top to bottom. In a simple timing diagram, the header bits move between units in a given layer in two periods (two clock cycles), and move between nodes in different layers in a short time. The payload bit ', like the header bit, uses two short times to move from one unit to another in the same layer, and instantly and effectively moves from one layer down to another. The header and payload bits use only a short time to move between nodes in a given layer in a ripple-like timing diagram. The payload bit effectively passes from one layer down through another. In this paired unit design, messages will only move between units on a given level when they deviate. Therefore, the non-deviated message has a payload bit that moves directly from the input pin to the output pin. Use timing diagrams that allow messages to pass through like holes in insects to achieve pin-to-pin connection. After the Ministry of Shanghai ’s decision i ..- ^-XJh-T elimination cooperation cooperation ^ (may read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Some embodiments of the switch include a multicasting option, One can perform one-to-all or one-to-many message propagation. With the use of multiple broadcast options, any input port can optionally send messages to many or all output ports. This message is duplicated in the switch, producing a duplicate for each output port. Multicast is suitable for ATM and LAN / WAN switches and supercomputers. Multicast is performed in straight forward mode, which uses another control line to increase the integrated circuit logic by about 20% to 30%. A multiple broadcast switch combined with ripple-type logic can increase timing complexity, especially when the design includes a flat latency operation. 7 This paper size: China National Standards (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () (Read the notes on the back before filling this page) In an actual implementation, The silicon switch of the topology is restricted by pins. In other words, the minimum number of logic gates required to make the switch is substantially smaller than the number obtained. As the integrated circuit chip size increases, the area increases in square and the perimeter increases linearly. Therefore, a larger integrated circuit chip has more gates than are guaranteed by the number of I / O pins. According to some embodiments of the invention, too many logic gates are used to achieve low latency. According to other embodiments of the present invention, LAN messages of 2 Kbytes or more include many dynamic first-in-first-out (FIFO) buffers to consume too many logic gates.
Coke S· Reed在1 995年7月21曰申請之美國專利申 請案號 08/5 05,513,案名爲,’MULTIPLE LEVEL MINIMUM LOGIC NETWORK”,揭露了一多層最小邏輯(MLML)網 路,其在此文中係全部配合作爲參考。多層最小邏輯網路 之光學實施例具有一結構,其中一最外面圓柱(頂層)之節 點具有輸入埠以接收訊息。在一整個時脈的短時間內,訊 息被插入至該最外面圓柱(頂層)之未鎖節點之中。節點間 的光學互連線(光纖)傳送訊息使得整個訊息適合於相鄰節 點之間。 經浐部中戎ir^-XJmJ.消於合作ii卬f 雖然多層最小邏輯網路傳送訊息沒有使用電子儲存 如記憶體或緩衝器,但在多層最小邏輯網路之電子設計實 施中,節點間之互連線可以先入先出(First-in,First-out, FIFO)緩衝器進行。例如,多層最小邏輯網路之一電子版 之一可能實施例主要是由FIFO構成,且藉由晶片中節點 間之至少轉接數乘以訊息長度乘以電路時脈速率而有一最 8_ 本紙張尺度適川中國國家標準(CNS ) A4^( 210X297公釐) 527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 小潛候期。去除FIFO緩衝器之電子設計將導致節點轉接 數乘以電路時脈速率之一最小潛候期。再者,去除FIFO 緩衝器可允許晶片主要是由單元或節點所組成而不是 FIFO元件,其有利於允許更大的網路適合於一晶片以及 利用蟲蛀之孔型路徑而大大地減少潛候期。 使用可縮放低潛候期開關之互連結構係使用藉由插入 訊息至晶片之新穎過程達到蟲蛀之孔型路徑通過積體電路 晶片之方法。如果整個訊息適合於第A和B行之間,訊 息會同時被插入於第A和B行,而非同時以每一角度插 入訊息於外面圓柱之每一未鎖節點之中。訊息在時間〇時 被插入至第0行。訊息在時間U + t。時被插入至第1行, 其中時間t。爲訊息之第一位元在頂層由第0行移至第1 行的時間。訊息在時間% + 2ί。時被插入至第2行.,以此類 推。此方法有利於避免一訊息之第一位元與已在開關中之 另一訊息之一內部位元相衝撞。因此,所有訊息之間的競 爭以解決只具有訊息如蟲蛀之孔通過許多單元之所欲結果 之第一位元之間的競爭來處理。在許多實例中,有效載荷 之第一位元在有效載荷之尾端位元進入之前離開該晶片。 根據本發明之一構想,使用由具有比輸入和輸出接腳 數所保證之行數多二至四倍或更多的行數的開關所構成之 過多邏輯閘極達到較低潛候期設計。在過多輸入接腳數之 行中沒有輸入連結,其以有效減少一訊息在通過該開關時 間爲另一' 訊息所偏離之可能性來減少開關中的競爭。潛候 期隨每一偏離的出現而增長。供應未連接於輸入線之其他 _ _9 本紙張尺度適/1]中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210X297公釐) (ti先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 、1Τ 527798 A7 ____ _ B7__ 五、發明説明() (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 行實質上會減少開關內的訊息流通密度和有利於減少潛候 期。在本發明之各個實施例中,定義不同之輸入埠和行組 態以調整和協調訊息流通密度,且利用比I/O連接爲多之 內部邏輯。 根據本發明之另一構想,定義不同的輸出埠和行組態 以支援不同互連目的。互連結構之兩個主要種類爲超級電 腦和網路(LAN/網際網路)設計結構。一超級電腦之輸出璋 組態忽視一輸出訊號之行位址且立刻自該開關汲取一訊 息。一訊息具有多個至一^目標的離開璋’即一組外部緩衝 器。開關之尺寸等於列數,儘管許多行包括於此設計中。 相較之下,一'網路(LAN)輸出訊號可使用一與複 數個目的地之一特殊訊息目的地有關之特殊行位址。該輸 出結構之大小爲列數乘以外部行數,一輸出組態實質上是 與一超級電腦之輸出組態相反。 總而言之,一種可應用_超級電腦之輸出設計供應一 最高的頻寬和最低的潛候期t可應用於網路之第二種設計 供應可能的最大埠數目。 根據本發明之不同實施例,一可縮放低潛候期開關支 援一廣大範圍的互連目標以用於許多互連應用。該可縮放 低潛候期開關支援平坦潛候期控制單元和單列控制單元。 該開關支援單一短時間的時序和起漣波邏輯時序。在一些 實施例中,該可縮放低潛候期開關支援多元播送 (multicasting)而在其他實施例中該可縮放低潛候期開關不 支援多元播送。該可縮放低潛候期開關之各種實施例支援 _______ 10 H民張尺度迻中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 不同輸入埠結構以達到各種設定之訊息流通密度,且支援 不同輸出埠結構以應用於低潛候期超級電腦至多埠LANs 的範疇中。該開關支援自小型超級電腦訊息至巨大型LAN 訊息的各種訊息。 根據本發明之另一構想,該可縮放低潛候期開關可作 爲一光學實施例,除了蟲蛀之孔路徑外,其具有幾個好處 優於MLML網路專利,此外,在一些實施例中,一訊息 標頭在一電子網路中會經過處理,該電子網路設定閘極在 一”從屬”光學網路,只攜帶有效載荷。該電/光混合開關 有益於利用每一技術之優良特色。 在一些實施例中,該可縮放低潛候期開關可製作於一 單一晶片上。一般來說,傳統網路是作爲獨立節點的一收 集站,其與電路板和多重電纜互連。該傳統實作昂貴且需 要許多晶片,電路板和高速電纜。該傳統實施具有一潛候 期,最理想爲幾微秒甚至到非常低訊息密度的幾百微秒。 相較之下,以使用現在的ASIC技術,一全載之5 12-璋可 縮放低潛候期開關的潛候期容易落在20-1 00奈秒範圍 中。 --------------1T------ (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經滴部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 互連結構與可縮放低潛候期開關之好處在下表中描述 之,該表比較了現今傳統網路和使用可縮放低潛候期開關 的結構的互連設計特徵: 傳統網路實施 可縮放低潛候期開關 使用電纜將多個分開 之節點互連於電路板 中互連,而造成一大 使用現今 ASIC方法將所 有控制單元(節點)置於 一低廉的積體電路晶 11 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規枋(210X29?公兑) 527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 型 和 昂 .弯· 的系統 片 上 節 點 爲 複 雜 的 J 其 包 節 點 爲 具 有 少 於 幾 打 括 用 於 檢 查 所 有 位 址 個 閘 極 之 簡 單 單 元 位 元 和 路 由 旗 標 的 邏 一 積 體 電 路 晶 片 支 援 輯 和 支 援 多 個 輸 入 丄山 m 幾 十 萬 個 單 元 y 白 任 (— -般接收四 或 更 多 個 何 輸 入 至 任 何 輸 出 提 輸 入 訊 號 ) 供 相 當 多 同 時 訊 息 路 i 徑 節 點 一 般 包 括 可 保 留 只 保 留 一 訊 息 之 一 或 一 整 個 訊 息K I綠 1衝 器 二 個 位 元 於 單 元 之 一 動 態 位 移 暫 存 器 中 , 訊 息 總 是: 在移動中 Ο 進 入 — 節 點 之 多 個 訊 白 第 一 單 元 傳 送 至 第 息 會 兄兄 爭 相 同 的 離 開 二 單 元 之 一 ” 佔 用 訊 路 徑 號 ” P T强 L造 成 第 二 單 元 之 可 能: 衝撞 當 _. 個 或 更 多 個 訊 息 訊 息 不 相 衝 撞 因 祝 爭 相 同 的 路 徑 時 爲 每 一 單 元 總 是 可 取 會 發 生 ”衝撞” 其 在 得 — 離 開 路 徑 〇 一 兄兄 後 面 會 處 理〔 ) 爭 的 單 元 會 接 收 到 一 佔 用 訊 號 而 被 拒 絕 使 用 該 路 徑 一 節 點 必 須 檢 查 訊 息 一 單 元 只 檢 查 該 訊 息 位 址 和 其 他 路 由 旗 標 之 二 個 位 元 和 一 佔 用 以 決 定 如 何處理 【訊 息 訊 號 以 決 定 路 徑 , 在 單 — 時 脈 週 期 可 容 易 進 行 處 理 在 一 傳 統 網 路 中 從 未 發 生 衝 撞 9 取 而 衝 撞 會 造 成 訊 息 要 重 代 之 者 爲 一 訊 息 可 轉 新 發 送 通 過 該 網 路 y 向 — 鄰 近 單 元 , 可 以 浪 費 所 有 獲 得 的 級 進 相 同 距 離 到 達 巨 標 Ο 以 到 達 一 目標 該 轉 向 過 程 只 會 消 耗 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 、1Τ 12 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標隼(CNS ) Λ4規枱(210X297公筇) ^7798 A7 B7 1'發明説明() 經濟部中央標準局员工消費合作社印製 ^—. ---一 — 些 時 脈 週期 在 ----_ ibb 傳 統 網 路 中 1 不 超 過 —* 或 二 個 位 元 衝 撞 會 造 成 整 個 訊 息 會 被 暫 時 保 留 在 一 動 將 被 緩 衝 或 儲 存 於 —* 態 位 移暫存 器 單 元 節 點 中 , 因 而 減 慢 級 中 訊 息 從 未 停 止 移 進 5 降 低 潛 候 期 以 及 動 使 該 節 點 之 邏 輯 複 雜 ft ' 不 支 援 訊 息 之 多 除 了 其他訊息 之 一對一 ‘路 7Z 播 送 徑 ,該可縮 放低潛 Η矣期開關 之 一實施例 支援一 •對所有和 — 對 多訊息發 送| (多 元 播 送 ) 個 訊 息 不 會 如 蟲 蛀 訊 息 跨 越 多 個 控 制 單 之 孔 般 通 過該網路 元 且 如 蟲 蛀 之 孔 般 通 過 該 網 路 使 得 該 有 效 載 荷 之 標 頭 甚 至 在 尾 端 進 入 該 晶 片 之 刖 即 離 開 該 曰 tir 日日斤 全 載 網 路 的 大 小 當 一 全 載 可縮放 :低潛候期 增 加 至 幾 百 或 幾 千 個 開 關 的 大 小 增 加 至 Μ 埠 時 y 有 效 輸 貫 量 幾 限 較 佳 實 施 例 的 輸 近 零 且 該 潛 候 期 增 加 貫 里 仍 然 超 過 4 0 % 且 至 4nr 法 接 受i 的長度 該 潛 候 期 分 佈 仍 然 是 窄 的 現 今 網 路 設 計 不 能 同 該 可 縮: 放低潛 候 期開5看 丨可 時 支 援 幾 千 個 埠 J 局 同 時 支 援 幾 千 個 埠 輸 貫 量 和 低; 曆候期 高 輸 貫 量 和低潛候 :期 有關結構和操作方法之本案實施例請參閱所附圖式之 說明,俾得一更深入之了解。在不同圖中使用相同標號表 13 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規格(210X 297公發 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁 、\\5 f 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 527798 A7 B7___ 五、發明説明() 示類似或相同▲的項目。 第1A圖係以槪觀形式說明可應用於本發明之幾個實 施例的一可縮放低潛候期開關的基本元件和互連該基本元 件之結構的方塊圖。 第1B圖係說明該方塊圖之一層中由右至左的連接圖。 第1C圖係爲該互連結構之一般化實施例的摘要示意 圖,其說明控制單元如何成爲組群的元件,如何互連組群, 資料如何由一單元流通至另一單元以及如何連接控制訊 號。 第1D圖係爲以訊息形式移動資料通過該互連結構之 一般方法的槪觀圖。 第2A,2B和2C圖係爲說明傳送通過第1A圖所示之 開關的訊息佈局的示意圖;第2A圖係有關於有一列標頭 之一訊息;第2B圖係有關於具有列及行標頭之訊息;第 2C圖有關於用於多元播送之一訊息。 第3圖係爲說明開關陣列互連之示意互連圖,其包括 詳細之開關陣列互連關係,例如資料和佔用訊號的連接。 第4圖係爲說明輸入訊號時序和輸出訊號時序的時序 圖,其描述在一通信技術之簡化實施例中訊息進入和離開 開關之時序和控制。 第5A圖係爲顯示一三態輸入端連接於該開關之摘要 示意連接圖;第5B圖係爲應用於第5A圖所示之開關之 控制時序訊號的時序圖,其使用三態時序以允許只使用單 一接腳以用於控制(輸出)和資料(輸入),因爲控制和資料 14 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) AAim (210X291 (劫先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)US Patent Application No. 08/5 05,513, filed by Coke S · Reed on July 21, 995, entitled "MULTIPLE LEVEL MINIMUM LOGIC NETWORK", discloses a multi-layer minimum logic (MLML) network. All the references in this article are for reference. The optical embodiment of the multilayer minimum logic network has a structure in which a node of the outermost cylinder (top layer) has an input port to receive a message. In a short time of the entire clock, the message It is inserted into the unlocked node of the outermost cylinder (top layer). The optical interconnection lines (fiber optics) between the nodes transmit the message so that the entire message is suitable for adjacent nodes. Warp Ministry Zhongrong ir ^ -XJmJ. Elimination of cooperation ii 卬 f Although the multilayer minimum logical network does not use electronic storage such as memory or buffers for transmitting messages, in the implementation of the electronic design of the multilayer minimum logical network, the interconnections between nodes can be first-in-first-out. -in, First-out, FIFO) buffer. For example, one of the possible embodiments of an electronic version of a multi-layer minimum logic network is mainly composed of FIFO, and at least between nodes in the chip The number of contacts multiplied by the length of the message multiplied by the clock rate of the circuit. There is a maximum of 8_ This paper size is suitable for China National Standard (CNS) A4 ^ (210X297 mm) 527798 A7 B7 5. Description of the invention () Small latency. Remove FIFO The electronic design of the buffer will cause the number of node transfers times the minimum latency of the clock rate of the circuit. Furthermore, removing the FIFO buffer allows the chip to be composed mainly of cells or nodes rather than FIFO components, which is beneficial Allows larger networks to fit on a chip and take advantage of the borehole path of the worm to greatly reduce latency. The interconnect structure using a scalable low latency switch is achieved using a novel process by inserting messages into the chip The wormhole's hole-shaped path passes through the integrated circuit chip. If the entire message fits between lines A and B, the message will be inserted at lines A and B at the same time, instead of inserting the message at each angle at the same time. In each unlocked node of the cylinder. The message is inserted into line 0 at time 0. The message is inserted into line 1 at time U + t. The time t. Is the first bit of the message at the top level. by The time from line 0 to line 1. The message is inserted into line 2 at time% + 2 and so on. This method is helpful to avoid the first bit of a message and another one that is already in the switch. One of the bits of the message collided. Therefore, the competition between all messages is handled by the first bit that has only the message such as the bug hole through the desired result of many units. In many instances, The first bit of the payload leaves the chip before the tail bit of the payload enters. According to one aspect of the present invention, the use of two to four times as many rows as guaranteed by the number of input and output pins or Too many logic gates with more rows of switches to achieve a lower latency design. There is no input link in the line with too many input pins, which effectively reduces the possibility of a message being deviated from another 'message by passing through the switch to reduce competition in the switch. The latency increases with each deviation. Supply other not connected to the input line_ _9 This paper is suitable for size / 1] Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 size (210X297 mm) (ti read the precautions on the back before filling this page), 1T 527798 A7 ____ _ B7__ V. Description of the invention () (Read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page) The line will substantially reduce the density of message circulation in the switch and will help reduce the latency. In various embodiments of the present invention, different input port and row configurations are defined to adjust and coordinate message flow density, and utilize more internal logic than I / O connections. According to another concept of the present invention, different output ports and row configurations are defined to support different interconnection purposes. The two main types of interconnect structures are supercomputer and network (LAN / Internet) design structures. The output of a supercomputer: The configuration ignores the row address of an output signal and immediately draws a message from the switch. A message has multiple exit targets, i.e. a set of external buffers. The size of the switch is equal to the number of columns, although many rows are included in this design. In contrast, a 'network' (LAN) output signal may use a special row address associated with a special message destination of one of a plurality of destinations. The size of the output structure is the number of columns multiplied by the number of external rows. An output configuration is essentially the opposite of the output configuration of a supercomputer. All in all, the output design of one applicable supercomputer provides a maximum bandwidth and the lowest latency t. The second design applicable to the network provides the maximum number of ports possible. According to various embodiments of the invention, a scalable low latency switch supports a wide range of interconnect targets for many interconnect applications. The scalable low latency switch supports flat latency control units and single-row control units. The switch supports a single short-term timing and ripple-logic timing. In some embodiments, the scalable low latency switch supports multicasting, while in other embodiments the scalable low latency switch does not support multicast. Various embodiments of the scalable low-latency switch support _______ 10 H Min Zhang scale shift Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 mm) 527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () Different input port structures to achieve various Set the message flow density and support different output port structures for applications ranging from low-latency supercomputers to multi-port LANs. The switch supports everything from small supercomputer messages to huge LAN messages. According to another concept of the present invention, the scalable low-latency switch can be used as an optical embodiment. In addition to the borehole path, it has several advantages over the MLML network patent. In addition, in some embodiments, A message header is processed in an electronic network. The electronic network sets the gate in a "slave" optical network and carries only the payload. This electric / optical hybrid switch is beneficial to take advantage of the excellent features of each technology. In some embodiments, the scalable low-latency switch can be fabricated on a single chip. Traditionally, a traditional network is a collection station that acts as an independent node, interconnected with circuit boards and multiple cables. This traditional implementation is expensive and requires many wafers, circuit boards, and high-speed cables. This traditional implementation has a latency, ideally a few microseconds or even a few hundred microseconds with very low message density. In contrast, using the current ASIC technology, the full-load 5 12- 璋 scalable low-latency switch's latency is easily in the 20-1 00 nanosecond range. -------------- 1T ------ (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) The benefits of scalable low-latency switches are described in the following table, which compares the interconnect design features of today's traditional networks and architectures using scalable low-latency switches: Traditional networks implement scalable low-latency The switch uses cables to interconnect multiple separate nodes in the circuit board, resulting in a large use of today's ASIC method to place all control units (nodes) in a low-cost integrated circuit crystal. 11 This paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CNS) Λ4 Regulations (210X29? Exchange) 527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention () The printed on-chip node of the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is a complex J, and its package nodes are provided with Less than a dozen dozen logic cell chips including simple cell bits and routing flags for checking all address gates, and support for multiple inputs 丄m Hundreds of thousands of units y Bai Ren (--generally receive four or more input inputs to any output to provide input signals) for a considerable number of simultaneous message paths i-path nodes generally include can retain only one message or one whole The message KI Green 1 punches two bits in one of the unit's dynamic displacement registers. The message is always: On the move. 0 Enter — Multiple messages from the node. The first unit is transmitted to the first brother. Leaving one of the two units "occupied the signal path number" PT strong L causes the possibility of the second unit: Collision When _. Or more messages do not collide, because it is always desirable to compete for the same path for each unit There is a "collision" where it has to-leave the path. A brother will deal with it later. The unit that received the dispute will receive an occupation signal and be refused to use it. With this path, a node must check the message. A unit only checks the two bits of the message address and other routing flags and an occupancy to determine how to handle the [message signal to determine the path. It can be easily processed in a single-clock cycle. In a traditional network, a collision has never occurred. 9 A collision will cause the message to be replaced. A message can be re-sent through the network. Y Direction—adjacent units, which can waste all the obtained progressive distances to reach the giant. Bid 0 to reach a goal, the turning process will only consume (please read the notes on the back before filling this page), 1T 12 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) Λ4 gauge (210X297) ^ 7798 A7 B7 1'Invention description () Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ —. --- a — some clock cycles in ----_ ibb traditional network 1 no more than-* or two Bit collision will cause the entire message to be temporarily retained in a motion that will be buffered or stored in the-* state shift register unit node, so the message in the slow-down stage never stops moving in. 5 Reduce the latency and activate the The node's logical complexity ft 'does not support as many messages as one of the other messages on a 7Z broadcast path. One embodiment of the scalable low latency switch supports one • for all and — for multiple message sending | ( (Multicast) messages will not pass through the network element like worm messages across the holes of multiple control orders and through the network like worm holes so that the header of the payload even enters the chip at the end. Immediately after leaving the tir, the size of the full-load network is scalable when the full load is increased: the low latency is increased to a few Or when the size of several thousand switches is increased to M port, the effective input volume is limited. The preferred embodiment has a near zero input and the latency is increased by more than 40% and the length of i is accepted by the 4nr method. The distribution of the waiting period is still narrow. Today's network design cannot be reduced: lower the waiting period and open 5 to see it. It can support thousands of ports at the same time. Bureau J supports thousands of ports and low throughput; High throughput and low latency: For examples of the structure and operation method of this case, please refer to the description of the attached drawings for a deeper understanding. Use the same reference numerals in different figures. Table 13 This paper size applies to Chinese National Standards (CNS) Λ4 specifications (210X 297) (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page, \\ 5 f Staff Consumption of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economy Printed by the cooperative 527798 A7 B7___ 5. The description of the invention () shows similar or identical items. Figure 1A illustrates the basics of a scalable low-latency switch that can be applied to several embodiments of the present invention in overview form. Block diagram of the structure of the element and interconnecting the basic element. Figure 1B is a right-to-left connection diagram in one layer of the block diagram. Figure 1C is a schematic diagram of a generalized embodiment of the interconnect structure. It explains how the control unit becomes a component of a group, how to interconnect groups, how data flows from one unit to another, and how to connect control signals. Figure 1D is a general example of moving data through the interconnection structure in the form of messages. A schematic view of the method. Figures 2A, 2B, and 2C are schematic diagrams illustrating the layout of messages transmitted through the switch shown in Figure 1A; Figure 2A contains information about a column of headers. Figure 2B is a message with column and row headers; Figure 2C is a message for multicasting. Figure 3 is a schematic interconnection diagram illustrating the interconnection of switch arrays, which includes detailed information Switch array interconnection relationship, such as the connection of data and occupancy signals. Figure 4 is a timing diagram illustrating the timing of the input signal and the timing of the output signal, which describes the timing and timing of the information entering and leaving the switch in a simplified embodiment of a communication technology. Fig. 5A is a schematic diagram showing the connection of a tri-state input terminal connected to the switch; Fig. 5B is a timing diagram of control timing signals applied to the switch shown in Fig. 5A, which uses tri-state timing To allow only a single pin to be used for control (output) and data (input), because the control and data 14 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) AAim (210X291 (read the precautions on the back before filling this page) )
527798 經濟部中央標率局員工消費合作社印裝 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 訊號是在不同時間產生。 第6A和6C圖分別爲8-列表和16-列表,第6B圖爲 說明一種產生用於分配控制單元於開關內之位置序列的方 法的示意圖。 第7A圖說明如何使用一二進樹狀發送技術將訊息發 送通過第1A圖所示之開關,其中訊息具有多個路徑到達 其目標列。 第7B圖爲說明一實施例,其較低層具有一增加的列 數以利當訊息到達其目標前減少訊息壅塞。 第8A圖爲說明用於在一路徑上將訊息由一層移至下 個較低層之訊息而至一預定目標之技術的示意方塊圖。 第8B圖顯示在一較低層之一訊息可阻擋在下個較高 層之訊息立刻移至較低層,且該被阻擋的訊息有另一機會 使用第8A圖所說明的技術移至較低層。 第9圖爲傳送互連圖,其說明在一列的一訊息路徑與 在較低層之列的連結關係以及強調因第6B圖顯示之8-列 表所描述互連方式之位置序列,以達到在一後續過程通過 該互連結構之一訊息爲相同訊息所阻擋的可能性非常低的 好處。 第1 0圖爲說明當訊息通過該開關時,一訊息標頭通過 該開關及縮短該訊息標頭的長度的示意圖,使得在訊息到 達該開關底部之前將整個標頭移除,此有利於造成較低潛 候期和較簡單之邏輯處理。 第11A圖爲耩成一先入先出(FIFO)緩衝器之一串連延 15 適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格( 210X 297公垃) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 、-° .1 CC 79 27 b 經濟部中央標準局負工消f合作社印製 A7 _ B7 _五、發明説明() 遲元件,第ΠΒ圖爲一種由延遲元件所組成之動態FIFO 緩衝器,以及第11C圖爲一光學FIFO結構。 第12A圖爲顯示在互連的相同行中不同準層之控制邏 輯的相對時序圖。 第12B圖爲顯示在互連的相同列中不同層之控制邏輯 的相對時序圖。 第13A圖爲用於一向下移動的訊息之控制單元狀態的 槪要圖。該單元的狀態儲存於一閂鎖中。也顯示用於邏輯 處理的延遲元件以及向上向下向左向右的互連方式。 第13B圖爲用於一向右移動的訊息之一控制單元狀態 的槪要圖。該單元的狀態儲存於一閂鎖中。 第14圖爲控制訊息流通通過一控制單元所需之一般邏 輯元件的流程圖。如果此訊息存在的話,此結果是爲設定 控制單元的狀態,使其送出向下或向右的訊息。 第15A圖爲高於第0層之一些層之控制單元實施例的 邏輯閘之詳細說明圖。此爲第13A圖和第13B圖的完整 說明,以及進行第14圖之流程圖所述之處理過程。 第15B圖爲在第0層之控制單元實施例的邏輯閘之詳 細說明圖,用於結合第2B圖所示之行定址的訊息。 第16A圖爲高速時序(無層間延遲)開關及其控制單元 的時序圖。所有層之處理過程在相同時脈週期發生,因而 減少潛候期。 第16B圖爲連接於相同行之二個高速控制單元的詳細 說明圖,討論該高速”起漣波”邏輯。 16 (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)527798 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of Invention () The signals are generated at different times. Figures 6A and 6C are 8-list and 16-list, respectively, and Figure 6B is a schematic diagram illustrating a method of generating a sequence of positions for assigning control units to switches. Figure 7A illustrates how to use a binary tree transmission technique to send a message through the switch shown in Figure 1A, where the message has multiple paths to its target column. Figure 7B illustrates an embodiment in which the lower layer has an increased number of columns to help reduce message congestion before the message reaches its target. Figure 8A is a schematic block diagram illustrating a technique for moving a message from one layer to the next lower layer message on a path to a predetermined target. Figure 8B shows that one of the messages in a lower layer can block the message of the next higher layer immediately to the lower layer, and the blocked message has another opportunity to move to the lower layer using the technique illustrated in Figure 8A . Figure 9 is a diagram of transmission interconnection, which illustrates the connection relationship between a message path in one column and the column in the lower layer, and emphasizes the sequence of locations of the interconnection methods described in the 8-list shown in Figure 6B to achieve the A subsequent process has the advantage that the probability that one of the messages of the interconnect structure is blocked by the same message is very low. Figure 10 is a schematic diagram illustrating that when a message passes the switch, a message header passes the switch and the length of the message header is shortened, so that the entire header is removed before the message reaches the bottom of the switch, which is beneficial to cause Lower latency and simpler logic processing. Figure 11A is a series of FIFO buffers that are successively extended. 15 Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X 297 public garbage) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page),- ° .1 CC 79 27 b Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Co-operative Society f. A7 _ B7 _ V. Description of the invention () Delay element, Figure ΠB is a dynamic FIFO buffer composed of delay elements, and 11C is an optical FIFO structure. Figure 12A is a relative timing diagram showing the control logic of different quasi-layers in the same row of the interconnect. Figure 12B is a relative timing diagram showing the control logic of different layers in the same column of the interconnect. Figure 13A is a schematic diagram of the state of the control unit for a downwardly moving message. The status of the unit is stored in a latch. It also shows the delay elements for logic processing and the interconnections up, down, left, and right. Figure 13B is a schematic diagram of the state of a control unit, one of the messages for moving to the right. The status of the unit is stored in a latch. Fig. 14 is a flow chart of general logic elements required for controlling message flow through a control unit. If this message is present, the result is to set the state of the control unit to send a downward or rightward message. Fig. 15A is a detailed explanatory diagram of a logic gate of an embodiment of a control unit of some layers higher than the 0th layer. This is a complete description of Figs. 13A and 13B, and the processing procedure described in the flowchart of Fig. 14 is performed. Fig. 15B is a detailed explanatory diagram of the logic gate of the embodiment of the control unit at the 0th layer, which is used in combination with the address of the row address shown in Fig. 2B. Figure 16A is a timing diagram of the high-speed timing (no inter-layer delay) switch and its control unit. Processing of all layers occurs at the same clock cycle, thus reducing latency. Figure 16B is a detailed illustration of two high-speed control units connected to the same row, discussing the high-speed "ripple" logic. 16 (Read the notes on the back before filling in this page)
本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規格(210X297公楚) 527798 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印^ 五、發明説明() 第17圖爲一 8列乘以4行之32埠開關圖,其顯示在 所有開關陣列中所有控制單元的佈局及互連方式,該開關 陣列構成一開關之完整實施例。 第18A圖顯示一平坦潛候期控制單元之七種狀態,亦 即在二列輸入及二個向上向下輸入和輸出之單元的互連方 式。 第18B圖爲描述至一平坦潛候期控制單元之許多輸入 値的結合如何決定其是在哪一個狀態的表格。該狀態用以 控制進入該單元之〇,1,2,3或4個訊息的流通。 第18C圖爲一平坦潛候期控制單元的詳細示意圖,其 使用第18B圖的表所決定的狀態以設定該邏輯閘因而發 送訊息通過該單元。 第18D圖爲一代表用於後面圖式中之一平坦潛候期控 制單元的簡明符號。 第19圖係說明一 16列乘以4行之64-埠平坦潛候期 開關之完整互連方式及佈局,其形成一平坦潛候期開關之 完整實施例。其顯示在所有開關陣列中所有控制單元的位 置及互連方式,以及討論如何進行佈局。 第20A,20B和20C圖爲單一路徑和平坦潛候期開關之 頂層之另一實施例,相對於最大可能之輸入數,其有利於 減少至開關之輸入數目,因而降低訊息密度和減少開關內 之壅塞。 第21A,21B和21C圖顯示在一層和各層之不同右至左 互連方式,以用於各種有利之設計需求。 17 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297). 527798 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention A switch diagram showing the layout and interconnection of all control units in all switch arrays. The switch array constitutes a complete embodiment of a switch. Fig. 18A shows the seven states of a flat latency control unit, that is, the interconnection of two input and two input and output units. Figure 18B is a table describing how the combination of many inputs to a flat latency control unit 値 determines which state it is in. This state is used to control the circulation of 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 messages entering the unit. Fig. 18C is a detailed schematic diagram of a flat latency control unit, which uses the state determined by the table of Fig. 18B to set the logic gate and thus sends a message through the unit. Fig. 18D is a concise symbol representing a flat latency control unit used in one of the following drawings. Figure 19 illustrates the complete interconnection and layout of a 64-port flat latency switch with 16 columns by 4 rows, which forms a complete embodiment of a flat latency switch. It shows the location and interconnection of all control units in all switch arrays, and discusses how to place them. Figures 20A, 20B, and 20C show another embodiment of the top layer of a single path and flat latency switch. Compared to the maximum possible number of inputs, it is beneficial to reduce the number of inputs to the switch, thus reducing the message density and the number of switches. Congestion. Figures 21A, 21B, and 21C show different right-to-left interconnections at one level and each level for a variety of advantageous design requirements. 17 (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)
本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規格(21〇X29D>^ ) 527798 A7 ΒΊ 經濟部中央標隼局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明() 第22A圖爲一低潛候期輸出電路之方塊圖,用於第2A 圖所描述之訊息以及企圖爲最低可能潛候期所用,如用於 一超級電腦;第22B圖爲第22 A圖所示之一元件的詳細 圖。 第23A圖爲使用第2B圖所描述之列和行定址之一開 關輸出的方塊圖,且企圖爲一大容量開關所使用,例如具 有非常多埠之一 ATM或電話開關;第23B圖和第23C圖 詳細說明第23A圖之元件。 第24A圖爲使用第2C圖所描述訊息之一多元播送控 制單元之元件方塊圖,以達到傳送一訊息由一輸入端至一 輸出端的目的,或是爲廣播(多元播送)一訊息至許多輸出 端或所有輸出埠。 第24B,24C和24D圖以整個形式說明當一多元播送訊 息沿一列移向右時之一多元播送控制單元的狀態。 第25A,25B和25C圖係描述以一多次元拓樸形成之 多晶片開關之訊息標頭佈局。 第26A圖係說明如何互連多個晶片以產生具有許多輸 出入埠之開關之示意圖。 第26B圖爲一代表第2D圖互連開關系統的符號,意 指爲”扭曲立方”。 第27圖係說明如何以三次元結構互連多個晶片以產生 具有相當多輸出入埠之一開關之示意圖。 第2 8圖係說明如何以四次元結構互連多個晶片以產生 眞有非常多輸出入埠之一開關(“4D開關”)之示意圖。 (讀先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) Μ 18 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標隼(CNS ) Mim ( 210X 297^1" 527798 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明() 第29A圖係說明如何將一訊息分割成爲原來大小的一 半之二個訊息以進入一低潛候期開關。 第2 9B圖爲一分割標頭開關之方塊圖,其在一具有主 從關係之開關中使用第29A圖之分割訊息,以減少約兩 倍之低潛候期。 第30A圖係顯示爲一電子光學開關所處理之一光學訊 息之佈局。 第30B圖係爲處理第30A圖所描述之訊息之一電子光 學控制單元。 第3 0C圖係爲用於第3 0A圖所描述之光學訊息之最上 面或輸入控制單元。 第30D圖係爲用於處理一光學訊息之光學放大器/再生 器之符號。 第3 0E圖係爲一完整電子光學開關,其顯示第30B圖 和第30C圖所描述之控制單元之互連方式以及單元之光 纖互連方式。 第3 1圖係爲由以一主從關係連接於一簡化的光學控制 單元之一電子控制單元所組成.之一混合控制裝置,以達到 顯著減少潛候期以及達到非常高頻寬之目的。 第32圖係爲使用第31圖所描述之兩種類型的控制單 元之一部分的混合電子光學開關以及其互連方式。 在不同圖式中所使用之相同符號表示相似或相同項 目。 用於高頻寬通信和電腦網路應用之可縮放低潛候期開 19 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規枋(210X297公势) (讀先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) .0This paper scale applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (21〇X29D > ^) 527798 A7 ΒΊ Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention () Figure 22A is a low-latency output circuit The block diagram is used for the information described in Figure 2A and intended for the lowest possible latency, such as for a supercomputer; Figure 22B is a detailed diagram of one of the components shown in Figure 22A. Figure 23A is a block diagram of the switch output using one of the column and row addressing described in Figure 2B, and is intended for use with a large capacity switch, such as an ATM or telephone switch with one of the many ports; Figure 23B and Figure 23C details the elements of Figure 23A. Figure 24A is a block diagram of components of a multi-cast control unit using one of the messages described in Figure 2C to achieve the purpose of transmitting a message from an input to an output, or to broadcast (multi-cast) a message to many Output or all output ports. Figures 24B, 24C, and 24D illustrate the state of one multiplex broadcast control unit when a multiplex broadcast message moves to the right along a column. Figures 25A, 25B, and 25C depict the message header layout of a multi-chip switch formed with a one-dimensional topology. Figure 26A is a schematic diagram illustrating how multiple chips are interconnected to produce a switch with many input and output ports. Fig. 26B is a symbol representing the interconnecting switch system of Fig. 2D, which means "twisted cube". Figure 27 is a schematic diagram illustrating how multiple chips are interconnected in a three-dimensional structure to produce a switch with a considerable number of I / O ports. Figure 28 is a schematic diagram illustrating how to interconnect multiple chips in a quaternary structure to produce a switch ("4D switch") with a very large number of I / O ports. (Read the precautions on the back before you fill out this page) Μ 18 This paper size is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) Mim (210X 297 ^ 1 " 527798 A7 B7 Printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs () Figure 29A shows how to divide a message into two half of the original size to enter a low latency switch. Figure 2B is a block diagram of a split header switch, which has a master-slave switch. The relationship switch uses the segmented message of Fig. 29A to reduce the low latency by about twice. Fig. 30A shows the layout of an optical message processed by an electronic optical switch. Fig. 30B shows the processing of 30A. One of the messages described in the figure is an electro-optical control unit. Figure 30C is the top or input control unit for the optical message described in Figure 30A. Figure 30D is the optic used to process an optical message Amplifier / regenerator symbol. Figure 3 0E is a complete electronic optical switch, which shows the interconnection of the control unit described in Figures 30B and 30C and the optical fiber interconnection of the unit. Figure 3 Figure 1 is composed of an electronic control unit connected to a simplified optical control unit in a master-slave relationship. A hybrid control device is used to significantly reduce the latency and achieve very high bandwidth. Figure 32 It is a hybrid electronic optical switch that uses part of the two types of control units described in Figure 31 and its interconnection method. The same symbols used in different drawings represent similar or identical items. Used for high-bandwidth communications and computer networks Road application of low-latency scale 19 This paper size applies Chinese National Standards (CNS) Λ4 Regulations (210X297 public power) (Read the precautions on the back before filling this page) .0
、1T 527798 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局負工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明() 關具有許多交互結構以執行許多類型之功能和大範圍之電 容量和效能特徵。第一實施例描述一開關衍生自二的乘方 設計規則,支援訊息蟲蛀孔路徑,只處理單一訊息長度, 點對點訊息傳輸,每一層具有一固定列數,且不適合一平 坦潛候期分布。開關100之第一實施例之描述形成建立所 欲之額外功能和特徵的基礎。額外功能和特徵一般包括多 元播送(一對多)傳輸能力,各種長度訊息之切換,低潛候 期傳輸,多晶片實施,以及一光纖開關的控制。該互連結 構之不同實施例在Reed的美國專利申請號08/505,5 1 3中 仔細討論。 請參閱第1A圖,該可縮放低潛候期開關100之一實 施例包括串連資料傳輸裝置之多列排列在多行160,162和 164中以及在多層130,132,134和136上。在每一行中以 資料匯流排122和控制匯流排124之結構互連各層。L+1 層以第〇層130,第1層132,至第L層136列出。這些 層包括複數個列R 170。該列執行一串連資料傳輸126, 沿每一列或每一層互連一開關陣列1 20之序列和一光學先 入先出(FIFO)串連延遲元件114。 以一訊息形式之串連資料經過所有資料輸入匯流排 102或由許多行進入開關100。該資料輸入匯流排102包 括複數個串連資料輸入埠104。串連資料藉由在每行之資 料輸出線1 5 8離開該開關1 00。該資料匯流排包括複數個 串連資料輸出埠154。也請參閱第2A圖,有利於進入任 何輸入埠104之訊息200離開該訊息標頭所指定之該輸出 20 本紙浪尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規格(210/297公殓) (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 527798 經濟部中央標>?-局貝工消费合作社印裝 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 埠154。在一實施例中,由開關100之一半導體晶片實施 所組成,在該晶片中’該輸入埠1〇4包括一輸入接腳連接 點,以及一輸出埠154包括一輸出接腳連接點。在爲高速 操作所設計之另一實施例中,複數個接腳作爲一單一輸入 璋或輸出埠連接點。多個晶片平行操作以產生一大型,高 速,非常低潛候期之開關。在爲非常多的I/O埠所設計之 再另一實施例中,複數個特別互連之晶片構成該開關1〇〇 之單一實施。 在開關100之實施例中,κ行以0,1,·.,Κ-1列出,包 含R個串連資料傳輸線1 70之每行連接產生達到R乘以 Κ個輸入埠104,且達到R乘Κ個輸出埠154。該資料線 數目R較佳是等於或小於,其中L+1爲開關100之層 數。在開關1〇〇之一實施例中,R 170等於2L且K較佳 爲一偶數以達到有利之最小訊息阻擋,此將在後面討論 之。在開關1 〇〇之一實施例中,在一較低之第j層之列數 170大於在其上之第j + Ι層之列數;在此實例中,R170 意指底層之列數。表一舉出用於大範圍較佳之K和L値 之開關1 〇〇大小之實例。在開關1 〇〇之一些實施例中,位 址埠數與列數相同,該行爲該埠有利地提供一頻寬的實質 增加。 表一 層(L+1) 行(K) 列(2l) 埠(列*κ) 4 4 8 32 4 6 8 48 21 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS )/\4蚬梠(210X29D>#_ ) (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂 527798 — B7 五、發明説明() 經濟部中央標嗥局員工消費合作社印製 5 8 16 128 6 8 32 256 6 10 32 320 7 12 64 768 8 16 128 2,048 9 16 256 4,096 11 28 1,024 28,672 15 24 16,384 393,216 19 32 262,144 8,388,608 21 36 1,048,576 37,748,736 請參閱第1A圖,每條行時序控制線與行1 60,1 62和164 相連,複數個行時序控制線108發出該個別行已準備接收 來自一外部裝置之資料的訊號。在每行之複數個璋取得線 106,配合行時序-控制線108,發出可獲得一對應串連輸 入瑋1 0 4以接收資料訊號。在結構1 1 6所示之一實施例中, 複數個緩衝器112串連訊息且將其儲存以用於後續注入於 頂層L 136之開關陣列120中。選擇的輸入結構116配合 輸入緩衝器112以控制進入該開關1〇〇之訊息200的時 序’以及控制後續的緩衝和注入該串連訊息於在該開關 100之頂層136的一開關陣列120中。在開關100之另一 實施例中,省略該結構1 1 6且資料立刻自輸入埠1 〇4移至 該開關陣列120。 在每行之複數個輸出控制線156接收來自一外部j置 之一裝置準備訊號。該訊號表示該外部裝置已準備接收來 自一對應之串連輸出埠j54之一訊息200。·在顯示於輸出 22 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) /以蚬格(210X 297^^1 請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 、11 f, 527798 kl B7 i、發明説明() 結構180之一實施例,在發送一訊息通過開關100之後, 複數個輸出緩衝器152儲存該訊息。在開關100之另一實 施例中,省略該結構1 80。在此實施例中,在底層之一開 關陣列120直接連接於輸出埠154。此外,輸出控制線156 同時連接於在底層之該開關陣列120。 爲串連資料形式之訊息自輸入埠104進入至該開關陣 列120之最上層136。在一實施中,該訊息接著向右移至 下一個開關陣列。該下一個開關陣列決定是否該訊息應往 下傳送至下一個較低層134,或是是否其應向右傳送且仍 然在同一層136。在一訊息向右移至在下一行之開關陣列 120之後,仍然在同一層之該訊息可能有一機會向下移至 v 下一個較低層。一向下落至該下一個較低層134之一訊息 進入在那層之開關陣列,在那兒其可以立刻向右移至在同 一層134之下一個開關陣列120。由上層進入一開關陣列 1 2 0之訊息總是離開該開關陣列而向右。由左進入一開關 陣列1 20之訊息離開該開關陣列而向右或向下。 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 若一訊息由上層進入一最右行164或是若一訊息由左 到達該最右行164,該訊息進入可選擇的串連FIFO延遲 元件114。在離開該FIFO之後,該訊息傳遞至列出口點 172。在一實施例中,出口點172連接於輸入埠1〇4,在 另一實施例中,該點內部連接於在相同層之相同列之列入 口點174,或外部連接於在另一晶片之相同層之該點174。 每當一訊息向右且進入下一行之該開關陣列120 ’仍然在 一特別層之一訊息可能有一機會向下落至該下一個較低 23 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4^枋(210X 297公兑) 527798 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局負工消f合作社印裝 五、發明説明() 層。在一實施例中,FIFO 144的長度固定;在另一實施 例中,FIFO 144的長度不同以允許有效率之各種長度訊 息處理;在再另一實施例中,皆省略FIFO。該FIFO的結 構和功能將在後面討論之。 進入該開關1〇〇之訊息200的時序藉由行準備訊號108 配合埠佔用訊號1 06來調節,使得該訊號的第一位元在時 序控制結構142所決定之時間進入該開關。該結構由時脈 訊號140和訊息長度控制訊號144作外部控制。進入相同 行之一輸出埠1〇4之所有訊息在相同時間進入。進入一行 而至該行的右邊之訊息在較晚時間進入’使得在相同層之 所有訊息之標頭位元可排列,即使這些訊息進入不同行之 層中。相較之下,在Reed的美國專利申請號08/505,5 1 3 所討論之MLML網路中,訊息是同時進入所有行。在該 開關1 〇〇之圖示說明實施例中,只有一位元延伸於行間, 而不是在例行技術中整個訊息之所有位元皆稱爲訊息”蟲 蛀孔”。行間的時序由延遲元1件148來調節,該時序將在 後面討論之。在該開關1 〇〇之一實施例中’進入一給定層 之一開關陣列1 20之一訊息的時序不同於進入不同層相同 行之另一開關陣列之訊息的時序。在此實施例中,層間的 時序由延遲元件1 46來調節。在另一實施例中,整個時脈 時序對許多或所有層來說爲相同的,且省略該延遲元件 146 一層中的連接 請參閱第1B圖並配合第1A圖,其顯示在一層中由右 24 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規彳Μ 210X 297公筇) (請先閱讀背而之注意事項再填寫本頁) -一0 527798 經濟部中央標準局負工消f合作社印製 A7 __B7五、發明説明() 至左之列連接。右手邊的出口點172向後連接至左而至在 相同層之一列輸入點1 74。在一些實施例中,可使用一排 列166,其中離開右手邊之一訊息發送至相同層之左手邊 之一不同列。在其他實施例中,右手邊之一連接點連接至 相同的列。第21A,21B和21C圖也顯示連接左邊和右邊 點之其他方式。 一般化實施例 第1C圖爲開關100的一般圖。在此圖中,爲明白起 見,許多元件如控制單元和控制單元之間的互連結構則省 略(在此圖中的名詞”左”和”右”分別意指連接至相同層之 單元的一輸入路徑和一輸出路徑)。控制單元186爲相同 層之一或多個群組單元的元件。一群組192包含一或多個 資料迴路184。在第1C圖,頂層包括一群組G[2,l]192, 其中第一參數(2)表示該層且第二參數(2)表示該層之一特 殊群組。在群組G[l,l]內之單元B 186連結於其他單元而 一起形成一連續資料迴路184。以循環通過迴路184之訊 息形式之資料移動通過單元A,B,C,D,E及至更遠。在訊息 長度爲長的一些實施例中,一 FIFO包括在資料迴路184 之中。在一資料迴路循環之一訊息有機會向下移至較低層 之任何連接群組的單元,如從G[2,l]至G[l,l]或至 G[l,2]。在一些實施例中,二群組相連接於每一群組之下 而構成幾組多重”二進樹狀(binary tree)”型式之連接路 徑。進入單元B 186之一訊息有機會向下188落至第一層 之群組G[l,2]之中。在下一單元(在此實例爲單元C)之一 25 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNsTa4規格(210X 297公犮) (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁), 1T 527798 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention () The Guan has many interactive structures to perform many types of functions and a wide range of capacity and performance characteristics. The first embodiment describes a switch-derived power-of-two design rule that supports the information bug hole path, only handles a single message length, point-to-point message transmission, each layer has a fixed number of columns, and is not suitable for a flat latency distribution. The description of the first embodiment of the switch 100 forms the basis for establishing the desired additional functions and features. Additional functions and features generally include multi-cast (one-to-many) transmission capabilities, switching of messages of various lengths, low-latency transmission, multi-chip implementation, and control of a fiber switch. Different embodiments of this interconnect structure are discussed in detail in Reed's U.S. Patent Application No. 08 / 505,5 1 3. Referring to FIG. 1A, one embodiment of the scalable low-latency switch 100 includes multiple columns of serial data transmission devices arranged in multiple rows 160, 162, and 164 and on multiple layers 130, 132, 134, and 136. The layers are interconnected in each row with the structure of a data bus 122 and a control bus 124. The L + 1 layer is listed as the 0th layer 130, the 1st layer 132, and the Lth layer 136. These layers include a plurality of columns R 170. The column performs a serial data transmission 126, interconnects a sequence of switch arrays 120 and an optical first-in-first-out (FIFO) serial delay element 114 along each column or layer. The concatenated data in the form of a message passes through all the data input buses 102 or enters the switch 100 from many lines. The data input bus 102 includes a plurality of serial data input ports 104. The serial data leaves the switch 1 00 by the data output line 1 5 8 in each row. The data bus includes a plurality of serial data output ports 154. Please also refer to Figure 2A, which is beneficial for a message entering any input port 104 and leaving the output specified by the message header. 20 The paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210/297 cm) (read first (Please read the notes on the back and fill in this page) 527798 Central Standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs>?-Bureau Beigong Cooperative Co., Ltd. Printing A7 B7 V. Description of Invention () Port 154. In one embodiment, the switch 100 is implemented by a semiconductor chip. In the chip, the input port 104 includes an input pin connection point, and an output port 154 includes an output pin connection point. In another embodiment designed for high-speed operation, a plurality of pins serve as a single input port or output port connection point. Multiple wafers operate in parallel to produce a large, high speed, very low latency switch. In yet another embodiment designed for a very large number of I / O ports, a plurality of specially interconnected chips constitute a single implementation of the switch 100. In the embodiment of the switch 100, the κ row is listed as 0, 1, .., K-1, and each row connection including R serial data transmission lines 1 70 generates R multiplied by K input ports 104, and reaches R times K output ports 154. The number of data lines R is preferably equal to or smaller than the number of layers, where L + 1 is the number of layers of the switch 100. In one embodiment of the switch 100, R 170 is equal to 2L and K is preferably an even number to achieve a favorable minimum message blocking, which will be discussed later. In one embodiment of the switch 1000, the number of columns in a lower j-th layer 170 is greater than the number of columns in the j + l layer above; in this example, R170 means the number of columns in the bottom layer. Table 1 gives an example of a 1000 size switch for a wide range of preferred K and L 値. In some embodiments of the switch 1000, the number of address ports is the same as the number of columns, and this port advantageously provides a substantial increase in bandwidth. One layer of the table (L + 1) Row (K) Column (2l) Port (column * κ) 4 4 8 32 4 6 8 48 21 This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) / \ 4 蚬 梠 (210X29D >#_ ) (Read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order 527798 — B7 V. Description of the invention () Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs 5 8 16 128 6 8 32 256 6 10 32 320 7 12 64 768 8 16 128 2,048 9 16 256 4,096 11 28 1,024 28,672 15 24 16,384 393,216 19 32 262,144 8,388,608 21 36 1,048,576 37,748,736 Please refer to Figure 1A, each row timing control line is connected to rows 1 60, 1 62 and 164, multiple The row timing control line 108 signals that the individual row is ready to receive data from an external device. A plurality of 璋 acquisition lines 106 in each line, in conjunction with the line timing-control line 108, are issued to obtain a corresponding series of input signals 104 to receive data signals. In one embodiment shown in the structure 116, a plurality of buffers 112 concatenate the information and store it for subsequent injection into the switch array 120 of the top L 136. The selected input structure 116 cooperates with the input buffer 112 to control the timing of the message 200 entering the switch 100, and to control subsequent buffering and injection of the series of messages into a switch array 120 on the top layer 136 of the switch 100. In another embodiment of the switch 100, the structure 1 16 is omitted and the data is immediately moved from the input port 104 to the switch array 120. A plurality of output control lines 156 in each row receive a device preparation signal from an external device. The signal indicates that the external device is ready to receive a message 200 from a corresponding serial output port j54. · Applicable to Chinese National Standards (CNS) / Grid (210X 297 ^^ 1) in the 22 paper sizes shown on the output. Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page), 11 f, 527798 kl B7 i, invention description ( An embodiment of the structure 180. After sending a message through the switch 100, a plurality of output buffers 152 store the message. In another embodiment of the switch 100, the structure 180 is omitted. In this embodiment, a switch array 120 on the bottom layer is directly connected to the output port 154. In addition, the output control line 156 is also connected to the switch array 120 at the bottom. The information in the form of serial data enters from the input port 104 to the uppermost layer 136 of the switch array 120. In one implementation, the message then moves right to the next switch array. The next switch array determines whether the message should be transmitted down to the next lower layer 134, or if it should be transmitted to the right and still be on the same layer 136. After a message moves right to the switch array 120 in the next row, the message still on the same layer may have a chance to move down to v the next lower layer. A message that has always fallen to the next lower layer 134 enters the switch array on that layer, where it can immediately move right to a switch array 120 below the same layer 134. A message that enters a switch array 12 from the upper layer always leaves the switch array to the right. Messages entering a switch array 120 from the left leave the switch array and go right or down. Printed by the Consumer Standards Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Enter the selectable serial FIFO delay element 114. After leaving the FIFO, the message is passed to the column exit point 172. In one embodiment, the exit point 172 is connected to the input port 104. In another embodiment, the point is internally connected to the entry point 174 in the same row on the same layer, or externally connected to the other port The point 174 of the same layer. Whenever a message goes to the right and enters the next row of the switch array 120 'still on one of the special layers, the message may have a chance to fall to the next lower 23 This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 ^ 枋210X 297 exchange) 527798 A7 B7 The Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives, Cooperative Cooperatives, Fifth, Invention Description (). In one embodiment, the length of the FIFO 144 is fixed; in another embodiment, the length of the FIFO 144 is different to allow efficient processing of various lengths of information; in yet another embodiment, the FIFO is omitted. The structure and function of this FIFO will be discussed later. The timing of the message 200 entering the switch 100 is adjusted by the line preparation signal 108 and the port occupancy signal 106, so that the first bit of the signal enters the switch at the time determined by the timing control structure 142. This structure is controlled externally by a clock signal 140 and a message length control signal 144. All messages entering one of the output ports 104 on the same line enter at the same time. Enter a line and the message to the right of that line enters later 'so that the header bits of all messages in the same layer can be arranged, even if these messages enter layers in different lines. In contrast, in the MLML network discussed in Reed's U.S. Patent Application No. 08 / 505,5 1 3, messages enter all lines simultaneously. In the illustrated embodiment of the switch 100, only one bit extends between the lines, instead of all bits of the entire message in the conventional technology are called the message "worm hole". The timing between lines is adjusted by delay element 148, which will be discussed later. In one embodiment of the switch 1000, the timing of entering a message of a switch array 120 of a given layer is different from the timing of entering a message of another switch array in the same row in a different layer. In this embodiment, the timing between layers is adjusted by the delay element 146. In another embodiment, the entire clock timing is the same for many or all layers, and the delay element 146 is omitted. The connection in one layer is shown in FIG. 1B and cooperates with FIG. 1A. 24 This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Regulations 210M 297cm (Please read the precautions below and then fill out this page)-1 527798 Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 __B7 V. Description of the invention () Connect to the left column. The exit point 172 on the right hand side is connected backwards to the left and enters the point 1 74 in a column of the same level. In some embodiments, a row 166 may be used in which a message leaving one of the right-hand side is sent to a different column of a left-hand side of the same layer. In other embodiments, one connection point on the right-hand side is connected to the same column. Figures 21A, 21B, and 21C also show other ways of connecting the left and right points. Generalized Embodiment FIG. 1C is a general diagram of the switch 100. As shown in FIG. In this figure, for the sake of clarity, many components such as the control unit and the interconnection structure between the control units are omitted (the terms "left" and "right" in this figure mean the units connected to the same layer, respectively An input path and an output path). The control unit 186 is an element of one or more group units of the same layer. A group 192 contains one or more data loops 184. In Figure 1C, the top layer includes a group G [2, l] 192, where the first parameter (2) represents the layer and the second parameter (2) represents a special group of the layer. Cell B 186 in group G [l, l] is connected to other cells to form a continuous data loop 184 together. Data in the form of messages circulating through loop 184 moves through units A, B, C, D, E and beyond. In some embodiments where the message length is long, a FIFO is included in the data loop 184. One of the loops in a data loop has the opportunity to move down to any unit in the lower-level connection group, such as from G [2, l] to G [l, l] or to G [l, 2]. In some embodiments, two groups are connected under each group to form several groups of multiple "binary tree" type connection paths. One of the messages entering unit B 186 has the opportunity to fall down to group G [l, 2] on the first level. In the next unit (in this example, unit C) 25 This paper size applies to the Chinese national standard (CNsTa4 specification (210X 297 cm)) (Read the precautions on the back before filling in this page)
527798 Α7 Β7 經滴部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明() 訊息有機會落至另一群組G[l,2],可將該訊息連接至不同 組的目標1 54。在一些實施例中,在有機會落至較低層之 任何群組之前,一訊息不必移動通過一群組中二個以上的 單元。 進入單元B 186之一訊息可優先向下移動於互連結構 188而至較低層之單元J,因爲單元J位在連結單元B與 訊息目標N 154之一路徑之上。單元L(在較低層)也連接 至單元J。若一訊息由單元L移至單元J,那麼在較低層 之單元L具有優先權。該優先權由單元L發出訊號,該 單元L傳送佔用訊號190至上面的單元B以通知單元B 不要往下傳送訊息。在一些實施例中,在向下路徑1 88之 開關194也由佔用訊號190來啓動,以避免來自發出訊號 單元之任何訊息與在較低層之共享路徑上的訊息相衝撞。 當一外部裝置如一輸入104無法給予佔用訊號190時,開 關194可有利於避免衝撞。 所有單元具有一離開路徑196至單元群組中之另一單 元(或至一 FIFO),且所有單元具有至其他單元之一佔 用訊號連接點190,可共享一共同路徑。若基於任何原因 一單元不能向下傳送訊息,該單元傳送訊息於互連結構 196之中而至相同層之相同群組192之另一單元。佔用訊 號190之顯著好處爲從單元群組之另一單元進入之一訊息 可獲得一離開路徑196。仍在一層中之訊息不能失去向下 前進的機會以向前移至該訊息目標。該訊息立刻面對連接 於在至該訊息目標之路徑上的較低群組之相同層之其他單 26 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) ( 210Χ 297ϋ"Τ (¾先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)527798 Α7 Β7 Printed by the Diaobei Central Standards Bureau Shellfish Consumer Cooperative 5. V. Description of the invention () The message has the opportunity to fall to another group G [l, 2], and this message can be connected to the target 1 54 of a different group. In some embodiments, a message need not move through more than two cells in a group before it has the opportunity to fall to any group in the lower layer. A message entering unit B 186 can be preferentially moved down to interconnect structure 188 and to unit J at a lower level because unit J is on a path connecting unit B and message destination N 154. Unit L (at the lower level) is also connected to unit J. If a message is moved from cell L to cell J, then cell L at the lower level has priority. The priority is signaled by the unit L, which sends the occupancy signal 190 to the above unit B to inform the unit B not to send a message downward. In some embodiments, the switch 194 on the down path 188 is also activated by the occupancy signal 190 to avoid any message from the signalling unit colliding with the message on the shared path on the lower level. When an external device such as an input 104 cannot give an occupancy signal 190, the switch 194 can help avoid collision. All units have a leaving path 196 to another unit in the unit group (or to a FIFO), and all units have an occupied signal connection point 190 to one of the other units, which can share a common path. If for any reason a unit cannot transmit a message downward, the unit transmits the message in the interconnect structure 196 to another unit in the same group 192 at the same layer. A significant benefit of the occupancy signal 190 is that an entry path 196 is obtained by entering a message from another unit in the unit group. Messages that are still in a layer cannot lose the opportunity to move forward to move forward to the message target. The message immediately faces other orders connected to the same layer of the lower group on the path to the target of the message. 26 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) (210X 297ϋ " Τ (¾ Read the notes on the back first) (Fill in this page again)
經濟部中央標準局員工消费合作社印裝 527798 A7 _ B7___ 五、發明説明() 元。進入單元A和離開單元N之一訊息路徑在第1C圖中 以粗線顯示。 第1A圖之檢查顯不許多路徑存在於任何輸入至任何 輸出154之中。 方法槪觀 第1 D圖係爲發送訊息通過開關1 00之方法的槪觀圖。 也請參閱第1A,1C和2A圖,一般來說,訊息進入在頂 層之互連結構1〇〇且向下移至右邊,其中發送該訊息在底 層之訊息目標列。該目標列位址編碼於該訊息的標頭中。 在一較佳實施例中,先出現該目標位址之最高有效位元和 最後出現最低有效位元。該有效載荷接續該標頭(在第2A 和2B圖中討論)。 訊息以自一控制單元通過另一控制單元之方式移動通 過開關1 〇〇。該開關1 〇〇之結構與訊息如何控制有親密的 關係且將會在下面仔細討論之。一控制單元位於每行與每 層間之交叉點的每一列,因此在每一控制陣列中。所有的 處理係在該簡單控制單元中執行。不需利用額外之訊息發 送元件。一控制單元只包含一或二個儲存位元,其在一例 示的實施例中爲一位移暫存器的形式。有利地,在一控制 單元包含不超過訊息之二個位元以減少邏輯需求和加速一 訊息通過該單元。一旦該控制單元決定將訊息傳送至何處 後,該單元設定內部閘極和發送訊息向下至目標或向右至 在相同群組之一單元。一般而言,在稱爲蟲蛀孔路徑方式 之過程中當訊息的位元以一單元至一單元方式通過該互連 27 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規梠(210'乂 297公發) (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 527798 A7 _ B7___ V. Description of Invention () Yuan. One of the message paths of the entry unit A and the exit unit N is shown by a thick line in Fig. 1C. The inspection of Figure 1A shows that many paths exist in any input to any output 154. Method Overview Figure 1D is a perspective view of the method for sending a message through switch 100. Please also refer to Figures 1A, 1C, and 2A. Generally speaking, the message enters the interconnect structure 100 at the top layer and moves down to the right, where the message is sent in the message target column of the bottom layer. The target column address is encoded in the header of the message. In a preferred embodiment, the most significant bit of the target address appears first and the least significant bit appears last. The payload continues the header (discussed in Figures 2A and 2B). The message is moved through the switch 100 from one control unit to another. The structure of the switch 1000 has a close relationship with how the message is controlled and will be discussed in detail below. A control unit is located in each column at the intersection between each row and each layer, and therefore in each control array. All processing is performed in this simple control unit. No additional message sending components are required. A control unit contains only one or two storage bits, which in the exemplary embodiment is in the form of a shift register. Advantageously, a control unit contains no more than two bits of the message to reduce logic requirements and speed up the passage of a message through the unit. Once the control unit decides where to send the message, the unit sets the internal gate and sends the message down to the target or right to one of the units in the same group. Generally speaking, when the bits of the message pass through the interconnection in a unit-to-unit manner in a process called the wormhole path method, this paper standard applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 Regulations (210 '乂 297). (Published) (Read the precautions on the back before filling in this page)
、1T, 1T
Her 527798 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7五、發明説明() 結構使訊息跨過多個控制單元。 一控制單元總是具有一可獲得之離開路徑至右邊 196,以確保自左邊進入一控制單元的訊息具有一可獲得 之出口。如所預期的,一訊息從未緩衝或保留在一控制單 元中,此有利於減少通過一控制單元的時間(潛候期)。該 單元只檢查一些標頭位元和來自一或多個鄰近控制單元之 一佔用訊號190以決定發送訊息至何處。可在單一時脈週 期容易執行此決定。若該控制單元具有一連接點向下至在 連接至該訊息目標之路徑上的群組以及可取得該連接點, 則該訊息向下傳送移動該訊息更接近該目標。否則,總是 可獲得路徑中傳送該訊息向右至另一控制單元,在其中重 複該過程。 當向下傳送一訊息和去除該最高有效位址位元以有利 於縮短標頭的長度和減少位元數目時,下一個單元必須準 備決定該訊息的方向。該下一個單元可有效存取適當標頭 位元,因爲無其他位址位元連續在適當標頭位元之前。去 除該最高有效位元是有利的,因爲該去除之標頭位元已被 用來決定訊息路徑通過該互連結構之目前部份且已不再需 要。 當傳送一訊息至在相同群組之一單元時,該訊息不會 失去向前完成橫越該互連結構至該訊息目標。向右之下一 個單元企圖傳送該訊息至該目標。向右傳送之一訊息可依 需要被延遲一或二個時脈週期。到達該互連結構右手邊之 一訊息被發送回至在相同層左邊的單元,如第ic圖描述 (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 28 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標導(CNS ) /\4規格(210X 297公犮) 527798 經濟部中央標準局負工消費合作社印1i A7 B7 1、發明説明() 中所討論。 一控制單元只監測該訊息標頭之一些位元以及來自另 一控制單元之一訊號以決定如何發送該訊息。在一時脈週 期中執行此決定。向下移動之訊息直接連接於在下面之單 元以越過該傳送單元之內部位移暫存器。該有效載荷被延 遲不超過一個以上的時脈週期。在實施例中(圖未示), 其中一控制單元具有多個向下路徑,一未被阻擋的訊息總 是具有一連接點至該訊息目標。在多重路徑的實施例中, 離開開關1 00之訊息的第一位元所經過的時間爲每一標頭 位元的一個時脈週期加上一或二倍的轉向數,該轉向是在 訊息通過該互連結構時發生。訊息以蟲蛀孔方式通過開關 100使得該有效載荷之第一位元可如預期在該有效載荷之 尾端進入該開關之前即離開。一般訊息以少於12個轉向 數到達一千列之其中一個。該有效載荷之第一位元以少於 15或20個時脈週期迅速離開一 1000-埠的開關。 訊息佈局 請參閱第2A圖,進入開關100之一串連訊息包括一 總是具有一値ONE之通訊位元(traffic bit) 202 ; —列標 頭204以鑑定在開關底層之目標列;以及一由串連資料位 元206所組成之有效載荷,其。該列標頭204爲一底層目 標列之二進編碼,此模式使得該目標列位址之最高有效位 元(MSB)208先出現且最低有效位元(LSB)210最後出現。 該有效載荷206包含在開關內自欲任何輸入埠傳送至任何 輸入埠或輸出埠群組之資料封包。在開關1 00之一些實施 29 本紙ί長尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規枱(210X297公發) (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Her 527798 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of Invention () The structure allows the message to cross multiple control units. A control unit always has an available exit path to the right 196 to ensure that messages entering a control unit from the left have an available exit. As expected, a message is never buffered or retained in a control unit, which helps reduce the time (latency) through a control unit. The unit only checks some header bits and an occupation signal 190 from one or more neighboring control units to decide where to send the message. This decision can be easily implemented in a single clock cycle. If the control unit has a connection point down to a group on the path connected to the message target and the connection point is available, the message is sent downward to move the message closer to the target. Otherwise, it is always possible to pass the message to the right to another control unit in the path where the process is repeated. When a message is sent down and the most significant address bit is removed to facilitate shortening the length of the header and reducing the number of bits, the next unit must be prepared to determine the direction of the message. This next unit can effectively access the appropriate header bit because no other address bits are consecutively ahead of the appropriate header bit. The removal of the most significant bit is advantageous because the removed header bits have been used to determine the message path through the current portion of the interconnect structure and are no longer needed. When a message is sent to a unit in the same group, the message will not lose forward completion across the interconnect structure to the message destination. The next unit to the right attempts to send the message to the target. One message sent to the right can be delayed by one or two clock cycles as needed. A message that reaches the right-hand side of the interconnect structure is sent back to the unit on the left side of the same layer, as described in Figure ic (read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 28 This paper size applies the Chinese national standard (CNS ) / \ 4 specifications (210X 297 gong) 527798 Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives 1i A7 B7 1. Discussed in the description of the invention (). A control unit monitors only some bits of the message header and a signal from another control unit to decide how to send the message. This decision is performed during a clock cycle. The message moved down is directly connected to the unit below to move over the internal displacement register of the transfer unit. The payload is delayed no more than one clock cycle. In an embodiment (not shown), one of the control units has multiple downward paths, and an unblocked message always has a connection point to the message target. In the multi-path embodiment, the time elapsed from the first bit of the message leaving the switch 100 is one clock period of each header bit plus one or two times the number of turns. Occurs when passing through this interconnect structure. The message passes through the switch 100 in a wormhole manner so that the first bit of the payload can leave as expected before the tail of the payload enters the switch. General messages reach one of a thousand columns with less than 12 turns. The first bit of the payload quickly leaves a 1000-port switch in less than 15 or 20 clock cycles. For the message layout, please refer to FIG. 2A. A serial message entering the switch 100 includes a traffic bit 202 which always has a ONE; a column header 204 to identify the target column at the bottom of the switch; and A payload consisting of concatenated data bits 206. The column header 204 is a binary encoding of an underlying target column. This mode causes the most significant bit (MSB) 208 of the target column address to appear first and the least significant bit (LSB) 210 to appear last. The payload 206 includes a data packet within the switch that is intended to be transmitted from any input port to any input port or output port group. Some implementations of the switch 1 00 29 This paper is long-range applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 gauge (210X297) (read the precautions on the back before filling this page)
、1T 527798 A7 B7__五、發明説明() 例中,該有效載荷206可以爲各種長度’其由動態時序結 構142所控制。 請參閱第2B圖,在開關100之另一實施例中’該底 層目標列如上面所述是由該列標頭204所決定,且該目標 行由行標頭2 1 2所決定。該行標頭包含行數之二進編碼。 在此實施例中,該第一標頭204以第2A圖所描述之模式 決定該目標列,並且第二標頭代表該目標行。在此實施例 中,該訊息可以在底層循環直至其到達該目標行爲止。在 另一實施例中,該訊息立刻向下移至第一可獲得之緩衝器 152,此將在後面討論之。該訊息200之總長度214包括 該通訊位元202,該標頭204及212和該有效載荷206。 請參閱第2C圖,在開關100之另一實施例中,該開 關1〇〇支援點對多點之廣播,一多元播送位元220表示該 訊息23 0是否將被傳輸至一輸出埠154或至許多輸出埠, 或至所有輸出璋。當該多元播送位元220設爲ZERO,該 訊息準確指向一輸出璋,且處理該訊息中之連續位元成爲 列標頭204,可選擇行標頭212以及有效載荷206,亦即 如第2A和2B圖所描述之相同定義。當該多元播送位元 220設爲ONE,下兩個位元位置作爲”上半部”224和,,下 半部”226標誌,亦即,利用他們作爲一對單一位元暫存 器(在該訊息標頭之內)以表示當訊息移動通過開關時之 訊息狀態。該剩餘位元構成一行位元標誌、228。多位元播 送過程之詳細內容將在後面討論之。在開關1〇〇之另一實 施例中’多元播送訊息使用列入口.點1 74進入任何層之特 (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂 ___________ 本紙張尺度適州中國國家標率(CNS ) Λ4規格(210X297公釐) 527798 A7 ____ B7五、發明説明() 經潢部中决標導局負.T消费合作私印W木 定列之開關。此訊息朝向底層列的特定子集。 第2A,2B和2C圖描述由輸入璋1〇4或列入口點174 進入開關1 〇 〇之訊息佈局。當訊息則進通過開關時,該訊 息的長度和其他特徵可改變。適當組合如第2A,2B和2C 圖所描述之訊息爲連接至輸入埠1 04之一外部裝置的責 任。 開關陣列佈居 請參閱第3圖並配合第1圖,每個開關陣列120包含 R個控制裝置300。一開關陣列120位於開關100中每行 與每層之交叉點。在開關100之一實施例中,每一個開關 陣列1 20在任何垂直資料線3 1 6上剛好包含一個控制單元 且在任何水平列360上剛好包含一個控制單元。在一些開 關陣列中,控制單元以”單位組態”方式排列,也就是說, 沿下左至上右之對角線,其中開關陣列中的垂直位置相同 於水平座標。該單位組態以開關陣列340顯示。在其他開 關陣列佈局中,控制單元以不同組態排列,如開關陣列342 所示。在一既定開關陣列中之控制單元的特殊排列爲開關 100適當操作之一關鍵所在,將在後面討論之。在開關100 之另一實施例中,每兩列360有一個控制單元(圖未示)。 在開關100之一實施例中,第130至136層中的每層 包含R個串連資料列126,自下而上由0 306編號至R-1 3〇8。第160至164行之每行包含自來上瘠之R個串連資 料線122以及包含來自下層之R個控制(佔用訊號)線 124。一輸出埠之編號318 .由在其下面之開關陣列的控制 (詞先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ________________________31 一 4~、紙張尺度诚州中國囤家標冷(CNS ) Λ4規格(210X 297公釐) 527798 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7五、發明説明() 單元的位置來決定。在第〇行,第L層之開關陣列120 包含一個控制單元300位於第1列。單元[1,0,L]之位置分 別由控制單元之列,行和層數來決定。因此,輸入埠3 1 8 編號爲1以配合連結於其上之控制單元之列數。 同樣地,輸出埠3 20編號爲2,因爲該埠連接在第2 列之控制單元322之位置爲[2,0,0]。輸入埠330編號爲0 是因爲該埠連接至在位置爲[〇,K-l,L]之控制單元324。輸 出埠344編號爲1是因爲該埠連接至在位置爲[1,K-1,0]之 控制單元328。 路徑316爲一串連傳輸線用以傳輸一訊息向下至底下 一層之開關陣列內的一控制單元,該路徑爲資料匯流排 120之一元件。路徑360爲一串連傳輸線用以傳輸一訊息 向右至在相同層之下一行,且其爲資料匯流排126之一元 件。路徑33 0爲一來自較低層之佔用訊號,且爲匯流排124 之一元件。 在一些實施例中,開關1〇〇構成內部網路用以互連一 超級電腦之多個處理器。在此結構中,裝置350爲其中一 個處理器。在開關1〇〇之另一實施例中,裝置350代表來 自一開關網路之一輸入璋的一連接點,例如在ATM開關 之內,其中此實施例作爲ATM開關之開關光纖。 第3圖說明外部裝置350與開關1〇〇的連接。外部裝 置3 50位於第2列,第0行160。外部裝置358連接在不 同行.164並接收一不同之行準備訊號。同樣地(圖未示), 外部裝置3 5 0連結於輸出埠3 72,該璋之佔用訊號3 74以 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)1T 527798 A7 B7__V. Description of the invention () In the example, the payload 206 can be of various lengths' which is controlled by the dynamic timing structure 142. Referring to FIG. 2B, in another embodiment of the switch 100, the bottom target column is determined by the column header 204 as described above, and the target row is determined by the row header 2 1 2. The line header contains a binary encoding of the number of lines. In this embodiment, the first header 204 determines the target column in the pattern described in FIG. 2A, and the second header represents the target row. In this embodiment, the message can be looped at the bottom level until it reaches the target behavior. In another embodiment, the message immediately moves down to the first available buffer 152, which will be discussed later. The total length 214 of the message 200 includes the communication bit 202, the headers 204 and 212, and the payload 206. Please refer to FIG. 2C. In another embodiment of the switch 100, the switch 100 supports point-to-multipoint broadcasting. A multiplex broadcast bit 220 indicates whether the message 23 0 will be transmitted to an output port 154. Or to many output ports, or to all outputs 璋. When the multiplex broadcast bit 220 is set to ZERO, the message accurately points to an output frame, and the continuous bits in the message are processed into the column header 204, and the row header 212 and the payload 206 can be selected, that is, as in section 2A. Same definition as described in Figure 2B. When the multiplex broadcast bit 220 is set to ONE, the lower two bit positions are used as the "upper half" 224 and, and the lower half "226" marks, that is, using them as a pair of single bit registers (in the (Inside the message header) to indicate the message status when the message moves through the switch. The remaining bits constitute a row of bit flags, 228. The details of the multi-bit broadcast process will be discussed later. On the switch 100 In another embodiment, the 'multicast broadcast message uses the column entry. Point 1 74 to enter the special features of any layer (read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order ___________ This paper size is suitable for China National Standards (CNS) Specification of Λ4 (210X297 mm) 527798 A7 ____ B7 V. Description of the invention () The Ministry of Economic Affairs and the Ministry of Commerce won the award of the bidder. T consumer cooperation private printing W wood fixed column switch. This message is directed to a specific subset of the bottom column. Figures 2A, 2B, and 2C describe the layout of the message from input 璋 104 or column entry point 174 to switch 100. When the message passes through the switch, the length and other characteristics of the message can be changed. A suitable combination is shown in section 2A , As described in Figures 2B and 2C Information is the responsibility of an external device connected to input port 104. For the layout of the switch array, please refer to Figure 3 and cooperate with Figure 1. Each switch array 120 includes R control devices 300. A switch array 120 is located in the switch 100. The intersection of each row and each layer. In one embodiment of the switch 100, each switch array 120 includes exactly one control unit on any vertical data line 3 1 6 and exactly one control unit on any horizontal column 360 In some switch arrays, the control units are arranged in a "unit configuration" manner, that is, along the diagonal from left to top right, where the vertical position in the switch array is the same as the horizontal coordinate. The unit configuration is based on switches Array 340 is shown. In other switch array layouts, the control units are arranged in different configurations, as shown in switch array 342. The special arrangement of control units in a given switch array is one of the keys to proper operation of switch 100. It will be discussed later. In another embodiment of the switch 100, there is a control unit (not shown) in every two columns 360. In one embodiment of the switch 100, the 130th to 13th Each of the 6 layers contains R concatenated data rows 126, numbered from 0 306 to R-1 308 from bottom to top. Each of rows 160 to 164 contains R concatenated data from the top and bottom. Line 122 and R control (occupied signal) line 124 from the lower layer. An output port number 318. Controlled by the switch array below it (words read the notes on the back before filling this page) ________________________ 31 a 4 ~ Paper Size Chengzhou China Store Standard Cold (CNS) Λ4 Specification (210X 297 mm) 527798 A7 B7 printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. The location of the unit is determined. In the 0th row, the L-level switch array 120 includes a control unit 300 in the first column. The position of the unit [1, 0, L] is determined by the number of columns, rows and layers of the control unit. Therefore, input port 3 1 8 is numbered 1 to match the number of rows of control units connected to it. Similarly, the output port 3 20 is numbered 2 because the position of the port connected to the control unit 322 in the second row is [2,0,0]. The input port 330 is numbered 0 because it is connected to the control unit 324 at position [0, K-1, L]. Output port 344 is numbered 1 because it is connected to control unit 328 at position [1, K-1, 0]. A path 316 is a control unit in a switch array connected to a lower layer through a series of transmission lines. The path is a component of the data bus 120. The path 360 is a series of transmission lines for transmitting a message to the right to a line below the same layer, and it is an element of the data bus 126. Path 33 0 is an occupation signal from a lower layer and is a component of the bus 124. In some embodiments, the switch 100 constitutes an internal network to interconnect multiple processors of a supercomputer. In this structure, the device 350 is one of the processors. In another embodiment of the switch 100, the device 350 represents a connection point from one of the inputs of a switch network, such as within an ATM switch, where this embodiment is used as the switch fiber of the ATM switch. FIG. 3 illustrates the connection between the external device 350 and the switch 100. The external device 3 50 is in the second column, and the 160th row is the 160th. The external device 358 is connected to a different .164 and receives a different travel preparation signal. Similarly (not shown), the external device 3 50 is connected to the output port 3 72, and the occupant signal 3 74 (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)
32 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規格(210X297公炱) 527798 Α7 Β7 經濟部中央標準局员工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明() 及行輸出準備訊號168。外部裝置350之輸出位址爲第2 列第〇行,其與輸入位址相同。開關1〇〇之輸入埠104 位於第L層136,且輸出埠154位於第0層130,或是在 省略第0層之開關100的一實施例之最下層。當一訊息200 完全通過開關100時,沒有該訊息之進入列和行之固有指 示。若開關1 00之應用或使用指定目標接受者可獲得”源 位址”,那麼源位址或確認包含於該訊息之有效載荷之內。 第3圖顯示以稀疏形式展開控制單元來說明連接的圖 樣。該佈局與編號方式也用來簡化後續的說明。在一積體 電路晶片的實施中,該控制單元排列在矽之上,以此方式 使包裝邏輯閘比圖中所示更爲緊密。 I/O及控制時序 至開關100之輸入介面由行時序和控制訊號來完成, 該控制訊號管理進入該行埠。第4圖顯示進入402和離開 420開關1 00之一訊息時序,以及控制它之控制和行準備 訊號。也請參閱第1A,2A和3圖,一訊息200由輸入埠104 進入開關1〇〇之實施例中,且該訊息自輸出埠154離開開 關。訊息之進入時序由行準備訊號1 08控制。訊息之第一 位元202較佳是在行準備訊號108活化後的一週期進入埠 104。若與輸入埠104有關聯之埠佔用訊號304到達高狀 態,那麼訊息200會被限制進入該輸入璋。行準備訊號108 控制所有位於一特定行102之輸入埠,然而埠佔用訊號304 只與一輸入埠104有關係。外部裝置350必須檢查行準備 訊號108與埠佔用訊號304以決定是否輸入埠1〇4可接收 33 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標率(CNS ) Λ4%彳Μ 210X29?公兑) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 、νδ 丁32 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 gong) 527798 Α7 Β7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of invention () and preparation output signal 168. The output address of the external device 350 is the 2nd column and 0th row, which is the same as the input address. The input port 104 of the switch 100 is located at the L-th layer 136, and the output port 154 is located at the 0-th layer 130, or the lowest layer of an embodiment in which the 0-layer switch 100 is omitted. When a message 200 passes the switch 100 completely, there is no inherent indication of the entry of columns and rows for that message. If the application or use of the switch 1000 is to obtain the "source address", then the source address or confirmation is included in the payload of the message. Figure 3 shows a sparse form of the control unit to illustrate the connection. This layout and numbering method is also used to simplify subsequent descriptions. In the implementation of an integrated circuit chip, the control unit is arranged on silicon, which in this way makes the package logic gate closer than shown in the figure. I / O and control timing The input interface to the switch 100 is completed by the line timing and the control signal, and the control signal management enters the line port. Figure 4 shows the timing of one of the messages entering the 402 and leaving the 420 switch 100, as well as the control and line preparation signals that control it. Referring also to FIGS. 1A, 2A and 3, a message 200 enters the switch 100 from the input port 104 and the message leaves the switch from the output port 154. The entry timing of the message is controlled by the bank preparation signal 1 08. The first bit 202 of the message preferably enters the port 104 one cycle after the line preparation signal 108 is activated. If the port occupancy signal 304 associated with the input port 104 reaches the high state, the message 200 will be restricted from entering the input port. The line preparation signal 108 controls all input ports located on a specific line 102, but the port occupation signal 304 is only related to one input port 104. The external device 350 must check the line preparation signal 108 and the port occupancy signal 304 to decide whether the input port 104 can receive 33. This paper size is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) Λ4% 彳 Μ 210X29? Comm.) (Please read the back first (Notes on this page, please fill out this page), νδ 丁
527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 一訊息。 行準備訊號108與埠佔用訊號304的時序較佳是在第 一位元202之時序410前的一時脈週期43 0進入開關。在 結合輸入緩衝結構Π 6之開關實施例中,第一訊息位元202 之相對時序410可大於在時序訊號40 8後之一時脈週期, 此實施例有利於使時序需求變得簡單。 離開開關之訊息420的第一位元202在時間428到達 輸出埠154,該時間爲行準備156之後的一時脈週期。在 較早期間426,由行輸出準備訊號156發出外部訊號,該 開關可接受來自一外部裝置之一輸出裝置佔用訊號376, 其說明該外部裝置無法接受一訊息。例如,該外部裝置爲 一充滿的緩衝器。當企圖離開之訊息爲外部所阻擋,其仍 留在該開關且企圖晚一點離開。 經濟部中央標準局負工消費合作社印製 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 在配合輸出控制結構180之開關100實施例中,行輸 出準備訊號156的時序與訊息420之第一位元的到達受 到第4圖所示者的延遲。在這些實施例中,週期426和428 之間的時間會增加而有利於使外部連接裝置的時序需求變 得簡單。在開關1 00之另一實施例中則省略外部佔用訊號 3 76,且當訊息到達其目標埠時,該訊息總是會離開該開 關。 三態I/O及時序 請參閱第3圖,在開關100之一實施例中,每一輸入 連接點與來自外部裝置3 50之一訊息輸入連接點以及至外 部裝置之一埠佔用訊號304有關連。在此實施例中,每個 34527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () A message. The timing of the row preparation signal 108 and the port occupancy signal 304 is preferably entered into the switch at a clock cycle of 43 before the timing 410 of the first bit 202. In the switch embodiment incorporating the input buffer structure UI 6, the relative timing 410 of the first message bit 202 may be greater than a clock period after the timing signal 408. This embodiment is beneficial to simplify the timing requirements. The first bit 202 of the message 420 leaving the switch reaches the output port 154 at time 428, which is a clock period after the line preparation 156. In the earlier period 426, an external signal is issued by the line output preparation signal 156. The switch can accept an output device occupation signal 376 from an external device, which indicates that the external device cannot accept a message. For example, the external device is a full buffer. When the message of attempting to leave is blocked by the outside, it remains at the switch and attempts to leave later. Printed by the Central Laboratories of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives (please read the precautions on the back, and then fill out this page) In the embodiment of the switch 100 with the output control structure 180, the timing of the output preparation signal 156 and the first message 420 Bit arrival is delayed by the one shown in Figure 4. In these embodiments, the time between cycles 426 and 428 increases to facilitate the timing requirements of externally connected devices. In another embodiment of the switch 100, the external occupancy signal 3 76 is omitted, and when the message reaches its target port, the message always leaves the switch. Please refer to FIG. 3 for the three-state I / O and timing. In one embodiment of the switch 100, each input connection point is related to a message input connection point from an external device 3 to 50 and a port occupation signal 304 to an external device. even. In this embodiment, each 34
本紙張尺度適用中國國家標隼(CNS ) Λ4規格(210X 297^"T 527798 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明() 輸入埠連接點需要二個外部連接點或接腳。同樣地,在相 同實施例中,需要二個外部連接點372和374支援一輸出 連接點。請參閱第4和5B圖,在時間408發出埠準備訊 號3 04是在時間410訊息200之第一位元202進入之前一 的時脈週期發生。因爲未重疊的時序狀況’所以單一三態 連接504可調節此二訊號。該外部連接504由三態輸入結 構502來控制,該外部連接504在時間408輸出埠準備訊 號3 04,且接著接收訊息200以輸入。亦即,在時間408, 三態輸入結構502接收來自時序訊號線108之行準備訊號 404。在時間404,該外部連接504連接於埠佔用訊號線304 達一個時脈週期。在時間410,該外部連接504連結於輸 入璋1〇4直至時序訊號408再度被接收514爲止。三態輸 入連接取代了輸入埠1〇4和埠佔用連接304,有利於取代 具有單一接腳之二個外部連接。 同樣地,一三態輸出結構(圖未示)爲輸出埠372和 外部埠佔用連接374提供單一外部連接。該三態輸出有利 於減少兩倍之輸出接腳數。在開關1 〇〇之較佳實施例中, 所有外部輸入與輸出連接使用三態I/O。三態控制504在 任何後續的討論不會被指出,取而代之的是埠104和174 作爲I/O璋以瞭解可選擇地取得三態I/O。 配置序列方法 在開關陣列120內之控制單元300的佈局完成訊息流 通之排列(將在後面討論之),其好處在於達成開關1 00 之成功操作和執行。請參閱第3圖,在既定層和行之開關 35 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規格(21〇Χ297ϋ"Τ (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X 297 ^ " T 527798 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention () The input port connection point requires two external connection points or pins Similarly, in the same embodiment, two external connection points 372 and 374 are required to support one output connection point. Please refer to Figs. 4 and 5B, the port preparation signal 3 04 is issued at time 408, which is the first of message 200 at time 410. A bit 202 enters the previous clock cycle. Because of the non-overlapping timing condition, the single tri-state connection 504 can adjust the two signals. The external connection 504 is controlled by the tri-state input structure 502, and the external connection 504 At time 408, the output port prepares a signal 3 04, and then receives a message 200 for input. That is, at time 408, the tri-state input structure 502 receives a preparation signal 404 from the sequence signal line 108. At time 404, the external connection 504 Connected to the port occupying signal line 304 for a clock cycle. At time 410, the external connection 504 is connected to the input 璋 104 until the timing signal 408 is received again 514. The tri-state output The input connection replaces the input port 104 and the port occupation connection 304, which is beneficial to replace two external connections with a single pin. Similarly, a three-state output structure (not shown) is an output port 372 and an external port occupation connection The 374 provides a single external connection. This tri-state output facilitates doubling the number of output pins. In the preferred embodiment of the switch 1000, all external input and output connections use tri-state I / O. Tri-state control 504 It will not be pointed out in any subsequent discussions, instead, ports 104 and 174 are used as I / Os to understand that the tri-state I / Os can optionally be obtained. Configuration sequence method The layout completion message of the control unit 300 within the switch array 120 The arrangement of circulation (discussed later) has the advantage of achieving the successful operation and execution of switch 100. Please refer to Figure 3, the switch at a predetermined level and line. 35 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specifications (21〇 × 297ϋ " Τ (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page)
527798 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印裝 五、發明説明() 陣列120中之控制單元300的佈局由配置序列決定。該配 置序列是依循沿一既定列360之連續單元較佳地交替位於 在下一層之上面和下面位置列(圖未示)的規則而產生。 也就是說,該佈局依循順序爲上,下,上,下等等,再者, 當任何其他單元在相同開關陣列120中時,該開關陣列佈 局總是以無控制單元位於相同列360或垂直路徑316之模 式執行,並且總是有一控制單元300在每一開關陣列120 之每列360中。 第6A圖說明了 8列之配置產生方法。使用零開始編 號,將.8個位置(0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7)602分成一上半部序列 (4,5,6,7)604和一下半部序列(0,1,2,3)606。最後配置序列 608由交替和合倂該上和下半部序列所形成。請參閱第63 圖,其顯示配置序列608在區域632中。線63 0將該區域 分成上和下部份,且顯示序列以上-下-上-下等形式交替。 該上和下序列之任何排列分別可用於產生一配置序 列,其有利於使用一規則產生一排列,其中R爲一層的 列數且N = R/4,選擇每一第N値,如有需要可重複。例 如,對8歹丨J 602來說,8/4 = 2所以自(4,5,6,7)604和 (0,1,2,3)606選擇每一第二個値以分別獲得(4,6,5,7)610和 (〇,2,1,3)612。這二種排列合倂成交替序列以形成配置序 列(0,4,2,6,1,5,3,7)614。此序列以圖示於區域634中。另 一規則是使用下降序列(7,6,5,4)620和(3,2,1,0)622,這些 合倂以形成配置序列624,以區域63 6顯示。該交替-合 倂操作確保了最後序列橫越在每個位置之上和下分割線 36 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準( CNS ) Λ4規彳Μ 210X29?公犮) (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 、-口 527798 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局負工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明() 630。一般來說,上面數字(4,5,6,7)604之任何排列和下面 序列(0,1,2,3)606之任何排列合倂以產生一 8列配置序 列。可選擇和使用任何序列以佈局一開關,開關1 00之較 佳實施例使用以剛給的”第N値”規則所產生之配置序列。 所用之一配置序列沒有限制的長度,可依需要重複序列。 例如,序歹ίΐ 614 可作爲(0,4,2;6,1,5,3,7,0,4,2,6,1,5,3,7,0)。 第6C圖說明了 16列640之實例,以合倂上642和下 644上升序列以產生該最後序列646而成。在另一實例650 則使用”第N値”規則,使用來自642和644之每一第四 値以分別產生上652和下654序列,這些合倂以產生配置 序歹[J 65 8。 此方法可延伸至任何偶數組的列。分割列數序列爲二 個相同等分:上和下,如第6A圖所舉的實例,形成每一 等分之排列和交替合倂該排列爲一單一配置排列。一 4列 序列可由合倂上(2,3)和下(0,1)序列來產生以生成 (0,2,1,3)。唯一二列序列爲(0,1)。 在奇數列的實例中,分割列數序列爲上和下序列,具 有中間値,隨意指定爲他們之其中一種。然後排列和合倂 該二序列,由具有多個値之排列開始。例如,給予7列 (0,1,2,3,4,5,6),分成上(3,4,5,6)和下(〇,1,2)部份,在此實 例中,上序列具有較多的値,所以合倂的序列變成 (3,0,4,1,5,2,6)。開關100之較佳實施例不包含由奇數列 所組成之列組。 訊息流诵 37 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規格(210Χ 297公犮) (請先閱讀背而之注意事項再填寫本頁 訂 Μ 527798 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消费合作社印裝 五、發明説明() 進入該開關之一訊息200以依循相似於由一二進樹狀 組所引導之路徑的路徑到達標頭204所定義之目標列。第 7A圖說明進入頂層及到達底層目標列的訊息A。訊息A 的位址爲第二列,亦即,在(H1,H2,H3)訊息標頭204爲 (0,1,〇),其表示(下,上,下)。爲簡化訊息流通的描述, 只顯示一資料路徑3 1 6於選定層之間,不需要在垂値排列 顯不行’且只顯不一些代表的列。 在列702中向右移動之訊息A 730面對向下連接至位, 於第二層762之一上列720的控制單元704。第二層邏輯 地分成二對列組:(1)位於上列組710的列,以及(2)位 於下列組7 1 2的列。該指示”上”和”下”並不表示在個別層 之列位置,而是指向下連接至列的列位置。在第7A和7B 圖,第二層之頂端部份之列710連接於第一層頂端716之 列。同樣地,第二層的底列7 1 2連接於第一層的底下半部 718。一列組在拓樸上與第1C圖所討論之一群組192相 同。訊息A之最高有效位元爲ZERO,其表示爲較低列組 的目標列,然而單元704連接至在較高列組710的一列 720 〇 訊息A仍留在列702且向右移至在下一行之單元706。 單元706向下連接至在較低列組712之列722。單元706 向下發送訊息A至列722。因此,向右移動只通過一或二 個控制單元之一訊息較具有一機會向下落至其目標。若(爲 後面所討論之原因)控制單元706無法向下傳送訊息A, 則該訊息持續在列702的右邊,且面對也連接於較低列組 38 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規格(210Χ 297公势) 請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)527798 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the Invention () The layout of the control unit 300 in the array 120 is determined by the configuration sequence. The configuration sequence is generated in accordance with the rule that consecutive units along a given row 360 are preferably alternately located above and below the next row (not shown). In other words, the layout is in the order of up, down, up, down, etc. Furthermore, when any other unit is in the same switch array 120, the switch array layout is always 360 or vertical with no control unit in the same column. The mode of path 316 is performed and there is always a control unit 300 in each column 360 of each switch array 120. Figure 6A illustrates the eight-column configuration generation method. Use zero-based numbering to divide .8 positions (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7) 602 into an upper half sequence (4,5,6,7) 604 and a lower half sequence ( 0,1,2,3) 606. The final configuration sequence 608 is formed by alternating and combining the upper and lower half sequences. See Figure 63, which shows the configuration sequence 608 in area 632. Line 63 0 divides the area into upper and lower parts, and the display sequence alternates from top to bottom-up-down. Any permutation of the upper and lower sequences can be used to generate a configuration sequence, which facilitates the use of a rule to generate an arrangement, where R is the number of columns in a layer and N = R / 4, each N 値 is selected, if necessary Repeatable. For example, for 8 歹 丨 J 602, 8/4 = 2 so from (4,5,6,7) 604 and (0,1,2,3) 606 select each second 値 to obtain ( 4,6,5,7) 610 and (〇, 2,1,3) 612. These two arrangements are combined into an alternating sequence to form the configuration sequence (0,4,2,6,1,5,3,7) 614. This sequence is illustrated in area 634. Another rule is to use descending sequences (7,6,5,4) 620 and (3,2,1,0) 622, which are combined to form a configuration sequence 624, which is shown in area 636. This alternating-combining operation ensures that the final sequence crosses the upper and lower dividing lines of each position. 36 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 Regulations 210 210X29? (犮) (Read the precautions on the back first) (Fill in this page again),-mouth 527798 A7 B7 Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives, V. Invention Description (630). Generally, any permutation of the number (4,5,6,7) 604 above and any permutation of the following sequence (0,1,2,3) 606 combine to produce an 8-column configuration sequence. Any sequence can be selected and used to place a switch. The preferred embodiment of switch 100 uses the configuration sequence generated by the "Nth" rule just given. One of the configuration sequences used has no limit in length and can be repeated as needed. For example, the sequence 歹 ίΐ 614 can be (0,4,2; 6,1,5,3,7,0,4,2,6,1,5,3,7,0). FIG. 6C illustrates an example of 16 columns 640, which is composed by combining the upper 642 and lower 644 ascending sequences to generate the final sequence 646. In another example 650 uses the "Nth" rule, using each fourth field from 642 and 644 to generate the upper 652 and lower 654 sequences, respectively, which are combined to generate the configuration sequence [J 65 8. This method can be extended to any even array of columns. The sequence of the number of divided columns is two equal divisions: up and down, as shown in the example in Fig. 6A, forming each division and alternately combining the arrangement into a single configuration arrangement. A 4-column sequence can be generated by combining the upper (2,3) and lower (0,1) sequences to generate (0,2,1,3). The only two-column sequence is (0,1). In the example of an odd-numbered column, the sequence of the number of divided columns is an upper and lower sequence with a middle unitary, and can be arbitrarily designated as one of them. The two sequences are then arranged and combined, starting with an arrangement with multiple units. For example, given 7 columns (0,1,2,3,4,5,6), divided into upper (3,4,5,6) and lower (0,1,2) sections, in this example, the upper The sequence has more 値, so the combined sequence becomes (3,0,4,1,5,2,6). The preferred embodiment of the switch 100 does not include a column group consisting of odd columns. Message flow 37 This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standards (CNS) Λ4 specification (210 × 297 mm) (Please read the precautions below and fill out this page for ordering 527798 A7 B7 Printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of the invention () Enter a message 200 of the switch to follow a path similar to the path guided by a binary tree group to reach the target column defined by the header 204. Figure 7A illustrates entering the top layer and reaching the bottom target Column A of message A. The address of message A is the second column, that is, the (H1, H2, H3) message header 204 is (0, 1, 0), which means (bottom, top, bottom). Simplify the description of the message flow. Only one data path 3 1 6 is displayed between the selected layers. There is no need to display it in a vertical line and only some representative columns are displayed. Message A 730 surface moving to the right in column 702 Pairs of control units 704 that are connected down to 720 on one of the second layers 762. The second layer is logically divided into two pairs of columns: (1) the columns in the upper column group 710, and (2) the following Columns of group 7 1 2. The indications "up" and "down" do not indicate The positions of the columns of the other layers are directed to the columns of the columns connected downwards. In Figures 7A and 7B, the column 710 of the top portion of the second layer is connected to the column of the top 716 of the first layer. Similarly, the second layer The bottom column 7 1 2 is connected to the bottom half 718 of the first layer. A column group is the same in topology as one group 192 discussed in Figure 1C. The most significant bit of message A is ZERO, which is represented as The target column of the lower column group, however, cell 704 is connected to a column 720 in the higher column group 710. Message A remains in column 702 and moves right to cell 706 in the next row. Cell 706 is connected down to the lower column Column 722 of group 712. Unit 706 sends a message A down to column 722. Therefore, a message that moves right through only one or two control units has a better chance to fall to its target. If (as discussed later Reason) The control unit 706 cannot send the message A downwards, so the message continues to the right of column 702, and it is also connected to the lower column group. 38 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210 × 297). ) Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)
、1T 527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 712之單元708,該訊息又有一機會向下落至較低列組。 第一層764邏輯地分成二對上和下列組7 1 6和7 1 8。 在第二層之列720連接g在第一層之頂端716之該對列 組,且列722連接至在底部718之該對列組。在標頭204 之下一位址位元ONE代表一上列組。在第二層,訊息A 在列722中向右移至連接於第一層之上列組712之單元 724。單元724向下發送訊息至第一層764之列734。第0 層766邏輯地分成四對列組。第0層爲最終目的層且列之 每一列組剛好包括一上列和一下列。在標頭204之最後位 址位元代表一下列組。訊息A在列722中向右移動且通 過上連接單元73 6而至一下連接單元73 8。單元73 8向下 發送訊息至最終目標列,即第二列744。 在開關1 〇〇之一實施例,訊息A在底層列742中向右 移動直至該訊息面對位於訊息行標頭212所指定行的一單 元。在此行,該訊息向下傳送至輸出埠154或輸出結構 1 50。在另一沒有使用行定址之實施例中,該訊息立刻向 下傳送至下一單元746。該標頭位址”010”爲一二進標 記’2”,因此訊息A離開第二列742。 經濟部中央標準局員工消费合作社印^ (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁 #«<. 在任何列中向右移動之一訊息具有多重機會向下移至 在下個較低層之目標列組。在一列中向右移動之一訊息向 左發送(圖未示)至在相同列組之最左控制單元之列入口 點1 74。在頂層任何列中之訊息有利於具有多重路徑至最 底層之任何目標列。在每一層,訊息標頭204中只有一位 .元被一控制單元檢查以決定該訊息之方向:向下或向右。 39 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規枱(210X297^^ ) 527798 A7 ______B7____ 五、發明説明() (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 在底層,沒有行標頭之一訊息立刻離開該開關;具有一行 標頭2 1 2之一訊息向右移動直至該訊息到達該特定行爲 止,或者該訊息立刻離開底列而至處理該行標頭之一控制 結構1 50。 增加列數 請參閱第7B圖並配合第1和7A圖,在開關100之一 實施例,每層的列數可以不同,自上而下增加數目。在另 一實施例,與開關1 〇〇大小有關之列數R 1 70爲底層之數 目。在開關1 〇〇之一較佳實施例,每層之列數R皆相同。 R爲2的乘方。第7B圖顯示開關100之實施例的三層, 其中頂層有四列774,下一層有八列776且底層有十六列 778。每層之列數不需要是相異的。例如,在一實施例之 列數自上層而下可有8,8,16,16,32和64的列數。另一舉 出的實施例具有之列數爲32,32,32,64,64,128和128。 經濟部中央標準局負工消费合作社印製 給定位於一層776的一列,其列數大於其上一層774 之列數。該列具有控制單元交替連接770且不連接772至 一單元而至上層。也請參閱第3圖,一開關陣列120在每 列3 60總是有一個控制單元。也請參閱第20A,20B和20C 圖,開關1〇〇之一實施例不是在連接至一外部裝置之頂層 皆有可能之輸出連接點。在此實施例中,頂層較少有訊息 流通壅塞情形。爲充分使用晶片中可獲得的邏輯閘,頂層 具有較下層爲少的列數。 訊息流通和訊息阻擋 當在不同層之二個訊息競爭相同的資料路徑,在下層 40 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規格(210Χ^97公i ) 527798 A7 B7 經漓部中央標準局員工消費合作社印氣 五、發明説明() 之訊息具有優先權。在此所描述之方法給予下層訊息優先 權是因爲後者可能會在開關中待較長的時間。用於實施此 優先權之結構和技術在第8 A和8B圖中說明。 第8A和8B圖顯示一簡化之控制單元的互連方式,第 8A和8B圖的所有單元在開關陣列中位置不同,他們在 兩層830和832以及四行中。也請參閱第1A,2, 3和7A 圖,控制單元804位於在第三層832之一開關陣列120中。 該控制單元藉由列3 60連接至右邊而至在相同層之下一行 的控制單元806。 具有標頭812之訊息A 802自上層進入控制單元804。 該訊息A通訊位元202爲ONE,其表示一訊息在單元804 中。當一訊息自上層進入一控制單元,該訊息仍留在列360 中且立刻向右移至在下一行之控制單元。訊息A在列360 中向右進行至單元806。 該訊息A標頭之最高有效位元爲ONE其表示該訊息 朝向底下一層之一上列850。控制單元806檢查通訊位元 202和最高有效位元208,且決定訊息A之下一層目標列 爲一上列組。控制單元806向下連接至控制單元820,此 發生在上列組850中。因此在一串連路徑3 16中向下發送 訊息A至控制單元820。依循用於自上層進入的訊息之規 則,在列822中立刻向右發送訊息A至第二層之下一個 單元824。 在第8A圖中描述訊息A802的流通。訊息A自上層進 入第三層,向右移動至下一行,且立刻被發送至在所欲之 41 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Μ規格(210X 297公矩) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 527798 A7 B7 經濟部中央標隼局員工消費合作社印^ 五、發明説明() 上列組85 0的一單元。將訊息A自單元806導向單元820 是因爲訊息A之最高有效位元208表示落至一上列組且 該訊息未被來自下面之另一訊息所阻擋。此描述表示此實 例中允許一訊息A沒有延遲地被移至下一個較低層中。 在一層中向右移動之訊息通過向下連結點之上而至控 制單元。該連接交替於下個較低層之上850和下852列組 之間。在另一實例中(圖未示),一不同之訊息E自左 進入控制單元806。訊息E之最高有效位元爲ZERO,其 表示該訊息朝向一下列組852。控制單元806連接至上列 組850,因此控制單元806向右發送訊息E至下一行而至 單元808。 請參閱第8B圖,在另一實例中,相同訊息A 802自 上層進入控制單元804且向右發送至控制單元806,如前 面所述。在訊息A進入控制單元806的同時,在第二層 之訊息B自左進入控制單元820。訊息B較來自上層之訊 息具有優先權使用共享路徑822。訊息B在列822中持續 向右至單元824,因而阻擋訊息A向下移動通過單元820 及在列822中向右移動。因爲列822立刻爲訊息B所佔 據,所以控制單元820無法接收來自上層(亦即來自控制 單元806 )之訊息。爲避免訊息A和B相衝撞,單元820 向上傳送佔用訊號至在訊號路徑330上的單元806。控制 單元806因而爲佔用訊號842所阻擋而無法向下傳送訊息 A。因此,單元806向右發送訊息A至下一行之單元808。 單元806向上傳送佔用訊號842以保護訊息A免於與一 42 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規格(21〇/ 297公疫) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)1T 527798 A7 B7 V. The unit 708 of the description of the invention () 712, the message has a chance to fall to the lower group. The first layer 764 is logically divided into two pairs of upper and lower groups 7 1 6 and 7 1 8. A column 720 on the second layer is connected to the pair of groups at the top 716 of the first layer, and a column 722 is connected to the pair of groups at the bottom 718. The address bit ONE below the header 204 represents a group above. On the second level, message A moves to the right in column 722 to the cell 724 connected to column group 712 above the first layer. Unit 724 sends a message down to column 734 of the first layer 764. Level 0 766 is logically divided into four pairs of column groups. The 0th layer is the final destination layer and each column group includes exactly one upper and one lower. The last address bit in the header 204 represents one of the following groups. Message A moves to the right in column 722 and passes through upper connection unit 73 6 to lower connection unit 73 8. Unit 738 sends the message down to the final target column, which is the second column 744. In one embodiment of the switch 1000, the message A moves to the right in the bottom column 742 until the message faces a cell located at the line designated by the message line header 212. On this line, the message is sent down to output port 154 or output structure 1 50. In another embodiment where row addressing is not used, the message is immediately passed down to the next unit 746. The header address "010" is a binary mark '2 ", so message A leaves the second column 742. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ (Read the precautions on the back before filling in this page #« <. Move one message to the right in any column has multiple opportunities to move down to the target column group at the next lower level. One message to the right moves in one column to the left (not shown) to the same The entry point 1 74 of the leftmost control unit of the column group. The information in any column in the top layer facilitates any target column with multiple paths to the bottom layer. In each layer, there is only one bit in the message header 204. The element is one The control unit checks to determine the direction of the message: downward or to the right. 39 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 gauge (210X297 ^^) 527798 A7 ______B7____ 5. Description of the invention () (Please read the Note: Please fill in this page again) At the bottom level, a message without a line header immediately leaves the switch; a message with a line header 2 1 2 moves to the right until the message reaches the specific behavior, or the message leaves immediately Column to control the structure of one of the row headers 1 50. To increase the number of columns, please refer to Figure 7B and cooperate with Figures 1 and 7A. In one embodiment of the switch 100, the number of columns in each layer can be different, starting from the top In another embodiment, the number of columns R 1 70 related to the size of the switch 1000 is the number of the bottom layer. In a preferred embodiment of the switch 100, the number of columns R in each layer is the same. R Is a power of 2. Figure 7B shows the three layers of the embodiment of the switch 100, where the top layer has four columns 774, the next layer has eight columns 776 and the bottom layer has sixteen columns 778. The number of columns in each layer need not be different For example, in one embodiment, the number of columns from the upper level may be 8, 8, 16, 16, 32, and 64. Another example embodiment has a number of columns of 32, 32, 32, 64, 64, 128, and 128. The Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs's Consumer Cooperatives printed a column positioned on layer 776, the number of columns is greater than the number of columns on the previous layer 774. This column has the control unit alternately connected 770 and not connected 772 to a unit to the upper level. See also Figure 3, a switch array 120 always has a control unit in each row of 3 60. See also Figures 20A, 20B, and 20C. One embodiment of the switch 100 is not an output connection point that is possible on the top layer of an external device. In this embodiment, there is less congestion in the information flow on the top layer. To be sufficient Using logic gates available in the chip, the top layer has fewer columns than the lower layer. Message flow and message blocking When two messages in different layers compete for the same data path, 40 paper standards in the lower layer apply Chinese national standards (CNS ) Λ4 specification (210 × ^ 97 male i) 527798 A7 B7 The employees of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Standards and Consumers Co-operative Air Co., Ltd. V. Invention Information () has priority. The method described here gives priority to lower messages because the latter may stay in the switch longer. The structures and techniques used to implement this priority are illustrated in Figures 8 A and 8B. Figures 8A and 8B show a simplified control unit interconnection. All the units in Figures 8A and 8B have different positions in the switch array. They are in two layers 830 and 832 and four rows. Referring also to Figures 1A, 2, 3 and 7A, the control unit 804 is located in the switch array 120, one of the third layers 832. The control unit is connected to the right by a column 3 60 to the control unit 806 in a row below the same layer. The message A 802 with the header 812 enters the control unit 804 from the upper layer. The message A communication bit 202 is ONE, which indicates that a message is in the unit 804. When a message enters a control unit from the upper layer, the message remains in column 360 and immediately moves right to the control unit in the next row. Message A proceeds right in column 360 to cell 806. The most significant bit of the A header of the message is ONE, which indicates that the message is directed to one of the bottom 850 columns. The control unit 806 checks the communication bit 202 and the most significant bit 208, and decides that the target layer below the message A is listed as a top group. The control unit 806 is connected down to the control unit 820, which occurs in the group 850 above. Therefore, message A is sent down to the control unit 820 in a series of paths 316. Following the rules for messages entering from the upper layer, message A is immediately sent right in column 822 to the next unit 824 in the second layer. The flow of message A802 is described in FIG. 8A. Message A enters the third layer from the upper layer, moves to the right to the next line, and is immediately sent to the desired paper size of 41. This paper applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) M specification (210X 297 mm) (Please read the back Note: Please fill in this page again) 527798 A7 B7 Printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ V. Description of the invention () A unit of the group 85 0 listed above. Message A is directed from unit 806 to unit 820 because the most significant bit 208 of message A indicates that it falls into an upper group and the message is not blocked by another message from below. This description indicates that in this example, a message A is allowed to be moved to the next lower layer without delay. Messages moving to the right in a layer pass down the connection point to the control unit. The connection alternates between 850 above and 852 below the next lower group. In another example (not shown), a different message E enters the control unit 806 from the left. The most significant bit of message E is ZERO, which indicates that the message is directed to one of the following groups 852. The control unit 806 is connected to the upper group 850, so the control unit 806 sends a message E to the right to the next line to unit 808. Referring to FIG. 8B, in another example, the same message A 802 enters the control unit 804 from the upper layer and is sent to the control unit 806 to the right, as described above. While message A enters control unit 806, message B on the second level enters control unit 820 from the left. Message B has priority over messages from upper layers using shared path 822. Message B continues right to cell 824 in column 822, thus preventing message A from moving downward through cell 820 and to the right in column 822. Because the column 822 is immediately occupied by the message B, the control unit 820 cannot receive the message from the upper layer (that is, from the control unit 806). To avoid the collision of messages A and B, the unit 820 sends the occupied signal upward to the unit 806 on the signal path 330. The control unit 806 is therefore blocked by the occupation signal 842 and cannot transmit the message A downward. Therefore, unit 806 sends message A to the right of unit 808 on the next line. Unit 806 sends the occupancy signal 842 upwards to protect message A from the same. 42 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (21〇 / 297). (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)
527798 經濟部中央標準局負工消費合作社印製 A7 ________五、發明説明() 訊息C在上層中發生可能碰撞。 控制單元808檢查訊息A的標頭812且決定訊息A朝 向在第二層之一上列組850。因爲單元808連接於一下列 組,單元808被強迫再度向右發送訊息A至單元810。爲 避免上述可能之衝撞,單元808也傳送佔用訊號至上層。 可避免一可能在單元80 8之上的訊息D落至單元808。最 後,在下一行之控制單元810連接至一上列組850。因爲 在單元810之訊息A不會爲下面所阻擋,所以單元810 向下傳送訊息A至在第二層之控制單元826。 在第8B圖中描述了訊息A之流通,其中訊息爲下面 同時直接向右移動之另一訊息B所阻擋而無法立即往下 移動。在訊息A向下移動至第二層之一上列組之前,訊 息A出入二行以上而向右。不管何時訊息向右移動通過 一控制單元,該單元總是傳送一佔用訊號向上至在其上之 單元,其禁止後者將訊息向下發送。 訊息流通關係 第8B圖說明訊息B阻擋訊息A向下移動。同樣地, 訊息B可能爲一訊息或下面的訊息所阻擋而變成被迫留 在第二層達一段延長時間。有利於避免訊息B在使訊息 A二度爲互連結構所阻擋之一位置。在第三層之控制單元 806藉由資料通道316連接至第二層之單元820,在與單 元8 06相同列之控制單元810藉由資料通道848連接至也 在第二層之單元826。單元826不是位在與單元820相同 的列上以期望避免訊息B二度阻擋訊息A,以及有利於 43 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(21〇X 297^>i.) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)527798 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 ________ V. Description of the invention () Message C may collide in the upper layer. The control unit 808 checks the header 812 of the message A and determines that the message A is directed to the group 850 on one of the second layers. Because unit 808 is connected to a group, unit 808 is forced to send message A to unit 810 to the right again. In order to avoid the possible collision mentioned above, the unit 808 also transmits an occupation signal to the upper layer. It is possible to prevent a message D, which may be above the cell 808, from falling to the cell 808. Finally, the control unit 810 in the next row is connected to an upper group 850. Because the message A in the unit 810 is not blocked below, the unit 810 sends the message A down to the control unit 826 in the second layer. The circulation of message A is depicted in Figure 8B, where the message is blocked by another message B that moves directly to the right at the same time and cannot be moved down immediately. Before message A moves down to one of the upper group on the second level, message A enters and exits more than two lines and goes to the right. Whenever a message moves right through a control unit, the unit always sends an occupancy signal up to the unit above it, which prevents the latter from sending the message down. Message circulation relationship Figure 8B illustrates that message B blocks message A from moving downward. Similarly, message B may be blocked by a message or the following messages and become forced to remain on the second floor for an extended period of time. It is beneficial to avoid message B in a position where message A is once blocked by the interconnect structure. The control unit 806 on the third layer is connected to the unit 820 on the second layer through the data channel 316, and the control unit 810 on the same row as the unit 806 is connected to the unit 826 on the second layer through the data channel 848. Unit 826 is not on the same column as unit 820 in the hope that message B will block message A twice, and it is beneficial to 43 paper standards that apply the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇X 297 ^ > i.) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)
527798 經濟部中央標準局負工消费合作社印製 A7 B7 --— -—------——---—— 五、發明説明() 消除重複阻擋的可能性。由第6A和6C圖所描述之方法 所產生之該配置序列可避免爲單一訊息多重阻擋。 第9圖分別說明在第3層902,第2層904和第1層 906之單元連接關係。在第3層之該配置序列 (0,4,2,6,1,5,3,7,0,···)614,第 2 層之下序列(0,2,1,3,0,···) 910與上序列(4,6,5,7,4,..·)912以及第1層之序列(〇,1,〇,.··) 918以圖式顯示。訊息路徑A 634顯示第3層與第2層之 間的互連關係。注意的是在任何一列如第〇列開始之訊息 仍留在那列。訊息路徑A自第一行95 2之第0列開始, 該第一行952向下920連接至也在第0列962之一單元。 在下一行954,第0列向下924連接至第4列964之一單 元,然後在956連接至第2列966之一單元等等,此係根 據序列614。在第二層之訊息路徑B 934顯示第2層904 與第1層906之間的連接序列。訊息路徑B自第一行962 之第〇列開始,且向下連接至也在第〇列972之一單元。 在下一行,第〇列向下連接至第2列974之一單元,然後 至第1列966之一單元等等,此係根據序列910。 訊息連接路徑A 634和B 93 4圖示證明該配置序列之 二個重要性質。首先,路徑A和路徑B交替向下連接至 下列組944和上列組942,其符合第7A圖所描述之訊息 發送路徑。其次,路徑A不再與路徑B連接直至已橫越 八行爲止。不同的是路徑A向下連接至在位置962和920 (八行的全部範圍)之路徑B。同樣地,在第二行954連 接至起始於964之路徑D (圖未示)之路徑A 63 4上之訊 44 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) ( 210X 297公势) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填涔本頁) 、1Τ 527798 經濟部中央標準局員工消f合作社印製 A7 B7五、發明説明() 息不再與路徑D連接,直至已橫越八行爲止。再者,在 第3層之任何列中移動之訊息沒有與在934下面之第二層 路徑連接,直至該訊息已移動通過八行。也就是說’路徑 A 634和B 934之間所顯示之些許連接關係爲起始於第三 層之任何行和列之任何路徑而保留。重要的是,在920阻 擋情況再度發生之前,起始於路徑A 952之訊息爲第二層 之3個其他訊息所阻擋且同時起始於路徑B 962之訊息爲 第一層之4或5個其他訊息所阻擋。因此,爲較低層之任 何訊息之多重阻擋的發生在統計上是大大地不可能。第二 層之路徑B 934與第一層之路徑C 936之間的關係爲路徑 B之訊息不會面臨路徑C,直至已橫越四行962至968爲 止。 第9圖比較訊息路徑A與訊息路徑B之個別連接關 係。在962路徑B之訊息起初位於阻擋在952路徑B之 訊息。然而,重要的是,在每個訊息之後續八個序列移動 中,訊息B不在阻擋訊息A之位置上。第9圖也說明在 第一層之路徑C 936之訊息阻擋962路徑B之訊息。路 徑C之訊息不會位於再度阻擋路徑B之訊息的位置上, 直至訊息已橫越四行。此關係爲進入讚個別層之任何列和 任何行之訊息而保留。再者,除了第〇層之外的任何層之 每個訊息可以總是交替於上列組和下列組,在每一行傳 送。 開關1 〇〇之其他實施例使用其他序列,例如第6A,6B 和6C圖之討論中所描述。可使用任何序列以允許一訊息 45 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) ( 210Χ29ϋΓΤ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)527798 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 -----------5.-Description of the invention () Eliminate the possibility of repeated blocking. The configuration sequence produced by the method described in Figures 6A and 6C can avoid multiple blocking for a single message. Fig. 9 illustrates the connection relations of the units on the third layer 902, the second layer 904 and the first layer 906, respectively. The configuration sequence at layer 3 (0,4,2,6,1,5,3,7,0, ...) 614, the sequence below layer 2 (0,2,1,3,0, ···) 910 and the above sequence (4,6,5,7,4, ...) 912 and the sequence of the first layer (0,1, 〇, ...) 918 are shown graphically. Message path A 634 shows the interconnection relationship between the third layer and the second layer. Note that messages starting in any column, such as column 0, remain in that column. The message path A starts from the 0th column of the first row 95 2, and the first row 952 goes down to 920 to a cell that is also at the 0th column 962. In the next row 954, column 0 is connected downward to 924 to one of the cells in column 4 964, and then in 956 to one of the cells in column 2 966 and so on, according to the sequence 614. The message path B 934 on the second layer shows the connection sequence between the second layer 904 and the first layer 906. The message path B starts from the 0th column of the first row 962 and goes down to a cell which is also at the 0th column 972. In the next row, column 0 is connected down to one of the cells in column 974, and then to one of the cells in column 966, etc., according to sequence 910. The message connection paths A 634 and B 93 4 illustrate two important properties of this configuration sequence. First, path A and path B are alternately connected downward to the following group 944 and the above group 942, which conform to the message transmission path described in FIG. 7A. Second, path A is no longer connected to path B until it has traversed the eighth line. The difference is that path A is connected down to path B at positions 962 and 920 (the full range of eight rows). Similarly, the second line 954 is connected to the path A 63 starting at 964 (not shown). The news on this paper 44 applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) (210X 297 public power) (please first Read the notes on the reverse side and fill in this page), 1T 527798, printed by the staff of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, A7, B7, and F5. Invention Description () The information is no longer connected with path D, until it has crossed eight lines. Furthermore, the message moving in any column of layer 3 is not connected to the path of layer 2 below 934 until the message has moved through eight lines. That is, some of the connections shown between the paths A 634 and B 934 are reserved for any path starting at any row and column of the third layer. It is important that before the 920 blocking situation reoccurs, the message starting on path A 952 is blocked by 3 other messages on the second layer and the message starting on path B 962 is 4 or 5 on the first layer at the same time Blocked by other messages. It is therefore statistically impossible for multiple barriers to occur for any message at the lower levels. The relationship between path B 934 on the second level and path C 936 on the first level is that the information of path B will not face path C until it has crossed four rows 962 to 968. Figure 9 compares the individual connection relationships between message path A and message path B. The message on path 962 is initially located on the message blocked on path 952. It is important, however, that message B is not in a position to block message A during the next eight sequence moves of each message. Figure 9 also illustrates that the message of path C 936 on the first layer blocks the message of path 962. The message of path C will not be located at the position of blocking the message of path B again until the message has crossed four lines. This relationship is reserved for messages entering any column and any row of the Zambian layer. Furthermore, each message in any layer except the 0th layer can always be transmitted alternately in the upper group and the lower group, and transmitted on each line. Other embodiments of switch 1000 use other sequences, such as described in the discussion of Figures 6A, 6B, and 6C. Any sequence can be used to allow a message 45 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) (210 × 29ϋΓΤ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)
527798 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明() 200至少有一週期連接至上和下列組。所有列之序列未必 是必須相同,序列也不必重複與層數或任何其他設計規則 有關之週期。此序列可以不必有如使用第6A圖所討論 之”Nth Value”規則產生之公平訊息流通,最少阻擋及低 潛候期之統計性質。 標頭長度縮短 當訊息在層之間傳送,標頭長度在每層中移除最高有 效標頭位元而縮短。請參閱第1 0圖,在第三層中,訊息 之目標列位址定義爲包含三個位元HI,H2和H3之訊息 標頭204。H1 208爲位址之最高有效位元,且H2 1054爲 下個最高有效位元。當訊息200向下移至下面較低層時, 最高有效位元H1 208會自訊息中移除,雖然通訊位元202 總是被保留。在第二層,H2 1 054因而變成最高有效位元。 標頭長度改變所預期之副作用爲訊息長度在每一層被減少 一個位元。當訊息200到達第0層時,標頭204之所有位 元會被移除,因而減少有效載荷位元通過開關傳送(潛候 期)的所有時間。 因爲此層的MSB 208總是依循通訊位元202 ,所以在 所有層(在第0層)之所有控制單元的設計是相同,其可 簡化晶片佈局。當向下傳送訊息時,去除目前的MSB之 另一好處爲一控制單元只須緩衝一接近訊息之前二個位 元。或者,若MSB未被移除,那麼下層之單元將必須等 候直至整個標頭在適當位址位元爲單元所檢查之前進入。 在此不利之情況下,一 8-位元標頭需要在訊息每次進入 _____ 46 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) /\4坭掐(210X297公处) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)527798 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention () 200 At least one cycle is connected to the above and the following groups. The sequence of all columns does not have to be the same, and the sequence does not have to repeat cycles related to the number of levels or any other design rules. This sequence need not have the statistical nature of fair information flow generated by using the "Nth Value" rule discussed in Figure 6A, with minimal blocking and low latency. Reduced header length When messages are transmitted between layers, the header length is shortened by removing the most significant header bit in each layer. Referring to FIG. 10, in the third layer, the target column address of the message is defined as a message header 204 including three bits HI, H2, and H3. H1 208 is the most significant bit of the address, and H2 1054 is the next most significant bit. When the message 200 moves down to the lower layer below, the most significant bit H1 208 is removed from the message, although the communication bit 202 is always reserved. At the second level, H2 1 054 thus becomes the most significant bit. The expected side effect of changing the header length is that the message length is reduced by one bit per layer. When the message 200 reaches layer 0, all bits of the header 204 are removed, thereby reducing the total time for the payload bits to pass through the switch (latency). Because the MSB 208 of this layer always follows the communication bit 202, the design of all control units in all layers (at layer 0) is the same, which can simplify the chip layout. Another advantage of removing the current MSB when sending a message downward is that a control unit only needs to buffer a bit that is close to the previous two bits of the message. Alternatively, if the MSB has not been removed, the lower-level cells will have to wait until the entire header enters before the appropriate address bits are checked by the cell. In this unfavorable situation, an 8-bit header needs to enter _____ every time the message 46 This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) / \ 4 坭 掐 (210X297 public place) (Please read the note on the back first (Fill in this page again)
527798 經濟部中央標隼局員工消f合作社印製 A7 ____________ B7_ 五、發明説明() 單元時有九個位元被緩衝於每個單元中,與開關100之較 佳實施例之控制單元只須一或二個時脈週期相較,每一單 元將花費九個時脈週期。 同步延遲元件 · 請參閱第11A圖並配合第1B和3圖,向右移動通過 一列360之訊息遇到一適當FIFO結構114且循環回至第 一行。爲避免第一訊息之第一位兀與第二訊息之一內部位 元相碰撞,產生一訊息以符合每層之一列,爲此理由,除 了沿著一列使用一暫存器,可使用另一延遲裝置。該FIFO 陣列包括複數個平行排列之獨立同步延遲裝置1 1 00,且 每個連接至一列3 60。該同步延遲裝置1100包括串連排 列連接之延遲元件1 1 02。一時脈延遲元件1 1 02的功能像 是一位元位移暫存器或是一 D正反器,使得在一時脈週 期進入該延遲元件之一位元在下一時脈週期之該延遲元件 的輸出端出現。一訊息位元通過串連之延遲元件裝置1100 之整個傳送時間爲包含於結構1100之延遲元件數乘以時 脈週期。一訊息200由串連輸出端11〇6的左邊進入FIFO 結構1 1 00且在輸出端1 1 0 8離開。時脈1 1 1 〇用於同步化 延遲元件1 1 02。一重置訊號(圖未示)起始化所有延遲 元件及其他邏輯元件。第1 1 B圖顯示使用一雙重相位時 脈1116以位移資料位元通過該FIFO結構之一動態位移 暫存器1 1 1 2。當與一正反器或相似延遲元件相較,動態 位移暫存器的好處爲可減少電晶體數目。 第lie·圖顯示一同步延遲裝置之一光學實施例1114。 47 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4&格(210X2077>i"7 ---------______丁______. 0 Μ (翱先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部中央標率局負工消費合作社印¾ 527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 可調整光纖延遲可由使用壓電材料結構來完成以實體延展 該光纖且改變光纖長度。由一脈衝光源所驅動之一光纖 1116傳遞訊息200通過光纖長度且爲一光學偵測器1120 所終止,該光學偵測器將該光學訊號轉換成可爲開關100 進一步處理的形式。 層和行時序 請參閱第8B和12A圖,進入位於第三層832之控制 單元806之訊息A 802可企圖落至在第二層之控制單元 820,其中該訊息A在串連路徑822中向右移動。然而, 在第二層向右移動之同時存在之訊息B 840較訊息A更 具優先權使用路徑822。爲迫使優先權,控制單元820傳 送佔用訊號842向上至控制單元806以適時模式避免後者 向下傳送訊息。因此,指定訊息流通時序使該佔用訊號842 到達控制單元8 0 6,此時間足夠使後者之單元作用於該訊 號。因此,在開關1 〇〇之一實施例,訊息B之通訊位元202 在訊息A之通訊位元2 0 2到達單元8 0 6之前先到達單元 82 0。在一既定之開關陣列120中所有控制單元同步操作, 使訊息之通訊位元同時到達開關陣列中的單元。在相同的 開關陣列1 20之所有單元接收相同時序訊號。 請參閱第12A圖並配合第11A圖,時脈1110控制在 控制單元300中的延遲元件。相對於時脈111〇 ,閂鎖設 定訊號1204被延遲1210使得單元之閂鎖(將在後面討論 之)在時脈週期中晚些被設定。 在一實施例中,在下層之控制單元比上面層相同行之 ____ 48 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標李(CNS ) Λ4規枱(210X 297公筇"7 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)527798 Employees of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs printed A7 __________ B7_ V. Description of the invention () Nine bits are buffered in each unit when the unit, and the control unit of the preferred embodiment of the switch 100 only needs to be Compared to one or two clock cycles, each unit will take nine clock cycles. Synchronous Delay Element Refer to Figure 11A and cooperate with Figures 1B and 3 to move right through a column of 360 messages to encounter a proper FIFO structure 114 and loop back to the first row. In order to avoid the first bit of the first message colliding with one of the internal bits of the second message, a message is generated to match one row of each layer. For this reason, in addition to using a register along one row, another can be used. Delay device. The FIFO array includes a plurality of independent synchronous delay devices 1 1 00 arranged in parallel, each connected to a column 3 60. The synchronous delay device 1100 includes serially connected delay elements 1 102. The function of a clock delay element 1 102 is like a one-bit shift register or a D flip-flop, so that one bit of the delay element is entered in one clock period and the output of the delay element in the next clock period appear. The entire transmission time of a message bit through the serially connected delay element device 1100 is the number of delay elements included in the structure 1100 times the clock period. A message 200 enters the FIFO structure 1 100 from the left side of the serial output terminal 1106 and leaves at the output terminal 1 108. The clock 1 1 10 is used to synchronize the delay element 1 102. A reset signal (not shown) initializes all delay elements and other logic elements. Figure 1 1B shows the use of a dual-phase clock 1116 to shift the data bits through one of the FIFO structures dynamically. When compared to a flip-flop or similar delay element, a dynamic shift register has the benefit of reducing the number of transistors. Figure lie. Fig. 1 shows an optical embodiment 1114 of a synchronous delay device. 47 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 & grid (210X2077 > i " 7 ---------______ 丁 ______. 0 Μ (翱 Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperative ¾ 527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () The adjustable fiber delay can be achieved by using a piezoelectric material structure to physically extend the fiber and change the fiber length. It is driven by a pulsed light source An optical fiber 1116 transmits the message 200 through the length of the optical fiber and is terminated by an optical detector 1120, which converts the optical signal into a form that can be further processed by the switch 100. For layer and line timing, see sections 8B and 12A In the figure, the message A 802 entering the control unit 806 on the third layer 832 can attempt to fall to the control unit 820 on the second layer, where the message A moves to the right in the serial path 822. However, the second layer Message B 840, which is moving to the right, has higher priority than message A using path 822. To force priority, control unit 820 sends an occupation signal 842 up to control unit 806 in a timely manner to prevent the latter from being transmitted down Therefore, specifying the timing of message circulation allows the occupied signal 842 to reach the control unit 806, which is enough time for the latter unit to act on the signal. Therefore, in one embodiment of the switch 100, the communication bit of message B 202 Arrive at unit 82 0 before communication bit 2 2 of message A reaches unit 8 0. All control units in a given switch array 120 operate synchronously so that the communication bits of the message reach the units in the switch array at the same time. All units in the same switch array 1 20 receive the same timing signal. Please refer to Figure 12A and cooperate with Figure 11A. Clock 1110 controls the delay element in the control unit 300. Compared to clock 111, the latch setting The signal 1204 is delayed by 1210 so that the unit's latch (discussed later) is set later in the clock cycle. In one embodiment, the control unit in the lower layer is the same as the upper layer. ____ 48 paper dimensions Applicable to Chinese National Standard Li (CNS) Λ4 gauge (210X 297 Gong " 7 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)
527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 一控制單元先接收到訊息200。在不同層相同行之訊息的 相對時序顯示於第12A圖中。第0層之閂鎖設定訊號1204 比第1層之閂鎖設定訊號1206早發生一個時脈週期。第 一層訊號在第二層1 208之前一個週期,以此類推至較高 層。該閂鎖設定訊號用於訊息流通之時序和控制。用於所 有層和行之時序訊號1110,12 04,12 06和1208由時序單 元並配合延遲元件146和148來產生。 第12B圖描述在相同層之相鄰行之相對時序。一訊息 200在相同時脈週期1110進入第j行之一控制單元,其 中行之閂鎖設定訊號1220爲高狀態。在一列360中向右 移動之訊息在訊息到達下一行j + 1 1232之前通過一定數 目之延遲元件。在一些實施例,該延遲元件爲在行間之 FIFO緩衝器。在其他實施例,該延遲元件爲一控制單元 的一部份。單一延遲元件之時間週期爲一個時脈週期1202 或二個週期。該行對行時間% 1240爲訊息到達下一行之 下一個控制單元所花的時間。該時間t。爲二行間所有延 遲元件延遲的總和。因此,下一行1230之閂鎖設定訊號 爲時間t。1242所延遲之第一行1220的閂鎖設定訊號。 經濟部中央標隼局貝工消費合作社印^ (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 一訊息200具有一預定最大長度Lmsg 214且每一位元 花一個時脈週期移動通過一給定的點。訊息通過第j行之 控制單元的時間以間隔1222來表示,而在下一行以間隔 1232表示。訊息間的時間tm1 242不小於訊息通過一控制 單元的時間,亦即,tm^Lmsg.tD。在一訊息通過一控制單 元之後馬上允許一後面之訊息進入單元。因此,時間tm 49 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS )八4規掊(2l〇x29D>^ ) 527798 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局負工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明() 決定何時傳送下一個閂鎖設定訊號1224。在任何給定層, 不同列之訊息以平行方式移向右,使得所有訊息之通訊位 元2 02和後面位元以”垂直對準方式”移向右。在垂直對準 方式中,每個通訊位元同時進入一控制單元,而所有其他 單元在相同開關陣列中。同樣地,在相同開關陣列中自控 制單元向下落之訊息一起以水平對準方式向下移動。當時 間t。小於訊息間的時間tm,那麼該訊息會橫越超過一個 以上的控制單元。因此該訊息以蟲蛀孔路徑通過開關。開 關100之一般實施例中,時間t。爲一或二個時脈週期, 結果有效載荷之前面位元在有效載荷之尾端進入之前離開 該互連結構。 一特定控制單元之閂鎖設定訊號之時序係由在開關陣 列中單元的行和層位置來決定。第12A圖描述在單行多 層之訊息時序之層間關係。第1 2B圖描述單層相鄰行之 閂鎖設定訊號之相對時序。在第12A和12B圖的討論中, 該名詞”層閂鎖設定”和”行閂鎖設定”意指相同訊號’此乃 根據描述之內容。請參閱第1A圖,在第0層第〇行之開 關陣列之時序提供主訊號。在第〇層第〇行之開關陣列上 面之層被延遲一個時脈週斯146,其完全決定所有層的第 一行時序。在每一層,每個至連續行而至右之訊號被延遲 元件148延遲一段時間t 1240,因而決定在相同層之剩餘 開關陣列至右的時序。 控制單元狀態 第13A和13B圖顯示控制單元元件和通過控制單元中 --------------------1 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 50 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規柏(210X 297^^.) 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 527798 A7 ____ B7__ 五、發明説明() 的訊息發送機構的方塊圖。自左邊進入在第W行1302之 控制單元1 300之一訊息200爲(1)向下發送通過線S 1312 而至底下一層,如第13A圖所示,或是(2)向右發送訊息 通過線E 1304而至下一行,如第13B圖所示。一控制單 元1 300具有一自線N 1310上層之訊息入口點,一自線 W 1 302左邊之訊息入口點,一至線E 1 304右邊之訊息出 口點,一向下至線S 13 12之訊息出口點,一至線BN 13 03 上層之佔用訊號輸出端,以及一由下至線BS 1 306之佔用 訊號輸入端。在圖中,該名詞”北”,”南”,“東”和”西”分別 意指”上”,“下”,“右”和”左”的方向。 請參閱第3,13A和13B圖,串連路徑360連接在相 鄰行相同列之控制單元的線E和線W。串連路徑316連 接線N和S,以及串連路徑3 30連接相同行之控制單元的 線BN和線BS。一閂鎖設定訊號1204連接至在1 32 8之 控制單元。延遲元件D0和D1 1102提供作爲”向前看”特 定訊息標頭位元之裝置或作爲調整訊息流通時序之裝置。 在第13A圖中,訊息C自線W 1 302的左邊進入控制 單元1 300。二個訊息位元(即線W之MSB 208及D1中 之通訊位元202 )以及佔用訊號線BS 1 3 06由控制單元檢 查且該單元決定訊息要藉由線S 13 12而向下發送。輸入 線W 1 302連接至線S,使訊息在相對時序1 322前二個位 元。因爲訊息C向下移動,線L不自左邊連接至輸入線 W。取而代之者是將線E自上層連接至輸入線N 1 3 1 0。 在第13A圖中的單元狀態以ZERO表示,其儲存於閂鎖 51527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (1) A control unit receives message 200 first. The relative timing of messages on the same line at different levels is shown in Figure 12A. The latch setting signal 1204 of the layer 0 occurs one clock cycle earlier than the latch setting signal 1206 of the layer 1. The first layer signal is one cycle before the second layer 1 208, and so on to the higher layer. The latch setting signal is used for timing and control of message flow. The timing signals 1110, 12 04, 12 06, and 1208 for all layers and lines are generated by the timing unit in cooperation with the delay elements 146 and 148. Figure 12B depicts the relative timing of adjacent rows in the same layer. A message 200 enters one of the j-th control units at the same clock cycle 1110, where the latch setting signal 1220 of the row is high. A message moving to the right in a row 360 passes a certain number of delay elements before the message reaches the next row j + 1 1232. In some embodiments, the delay element is a FIFO buffer between lines. In other embodiments, the delay element is part of a control unit. The time period of a single delay element is one clock period 1202 or two periods. The line-to-line time% 1240 is the time it takes for the message to reach the next control unit on the next line. The time t. Is the sum of the delays of all the delay elements between the two lines. Therefore, the latch setting signal of the next line 1230 is time t. The latch set signal of the first line 1220 delayed by 1242. Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperatives ^ (Read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) A message 200 has a predetermined maximum length of Lmsg 214 and each bit takes a clock cycle to move through a given Point. The time for the message to pass through the control unit on line j is represented by interval 1222, and the next line is represented by interval 1232. The time between messages tm1 242 is not less than the time that messages pass through a control unit, that is, tm ^ Lmsg.tD. Immediately after a message passes a control unit, a subsequent message is allowed to enter the unit. Therefore, time tm 49 This paper size applies Chinese National Standards (CNS) Rule 8 (2l0x29D > ^) 527798 A7 B7 Printed by the Central Consumers Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives V. Invention Description () Decide when to send the next A latch sets the signal 1224. At any given level, the messages in different columns move to the right in parallel, so that the communication bits 202 and the following bits of all messages move to the right in a "vertical alignment". In vertical alignment, each communication bit enters a control unit at the same time, while all other units are in the same switch array. In the same way, in the same switch array, the message from the control unit to the falling together moves down in a horizontal alignment. Time t. Less than the time tm between messages, the message will traverse more than one control unit. The message therefore passes through the switch in a wormhole path. In a general embodiment of the switch 100, time t. For one or two clock cycles, it turns out that the area bits before the payload leave the interconnect structure before the tail end of the payload enters. The timing of the latch setting signal for a particular control unit is determined by the row and layer positions of the units in the switch array. Figure 12A depicts the inter-layer relationship of the message timing in a single row and multiple layers. Figure 12B illustrates the relative timing of the latch setting signals of adjacent rows in a single layer. In the discussion of Figs. 12A and 12B, the terms "layer latch setting" and "row latch setting" mean the same signal ', which is based on the description. Please refer to Fig. 1A, the main signal is provided at the timing of the switch array of the 0th row and the 0th row. The layer above the switch array of layer 0 and row 0 is delayed by one clock cycle 146, which completely determines the timing of the first row of all layers. At each layer, each of the signals from the right to the consecutive rows to the right is delayed by the delay element 148 for a period of t 1240, thus determining the timing of the remaining switch arrays to the right at the same layer. Control unit status Figures 13A and 13B show the control unit components and the passing control unit -------------------- 1 ) 50 This paper size applies Chinese National Standards (CNS) Λ4 ruling (210X 297 ^^.) Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, printed 527798 A7 ____ B7__ 5. Block diagram of the message sending mechanism of the description of the invention () . From the left, enter one of the control units 1 300 in line W 1302. Message 200 is (1) sent down through line S 1312 to the next layer, as shown in Figure 13A, or (2) sent to the right through the message. Line E 1304 goes to the next line, as shown in Figure 13B. A control unit 1 300 has a message entry point from the upper level of line N 1310, a message entry point from the left of line W 1 302, a message exit point to the right of line E 1 304, and a message exit down to line S 13 12 Point, one to the occupancy signal output terminal of the upper layer BN 13 03 and one to the occupancy signal input terminal of the lower line BS 1 306. In the figure, the terms "north", "south", "east" and "west" mean the directions of "up", "down", "right" and "left", respectively. Referring to Figs. 3, 13A and 13B, the serial path 360 connects the lines E and W of the control units in adjacent rows and the same column. The serial path 316 connects the lines N and S, and the serial path 3 30 connects the lines BN and BS of the control units in the same row. A latch setting signal 1204 is connected to the control unit at 1 32 8. The delay elements D0 and D1 1102 are provided as means for "looking forward" to specific message header bits or as means for adjusting the timing of message flow. In Fig. 13A, the message C enters the control unit 1 300 from the left side of the line W 1 302. The two message bits (ie, the MSB 208 of line W and the communication bit 202 in D1) and the occupied signal line BS 1 3 06 are checked by the control unit and the unit determines that the message is to be sent down through line S 13 12. The input line W 1 302 is connected to the line S so that the message is two bits before the relative timing 1 322. Because message C moves down, line L is not connected to input line W from the left. Instead, the line E is connected from the upper layer to the input line N 1 3 1 0. The state of the unit in Figure 13A is indicated by ZERO, which is stored in the latch 51
本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) /\4坭格(21〇X 297^>^ T (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) / \ 4 坭 格 (21〇X 297 ^ > ^ T (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)
527798 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消f合作社印製 五、發明説明() 1316 ( —個位元暫存器)之中。該佔用訊號傳送一 ZER0 向上至線BN 1 3 08,其連接至閂鎖輸出端。此表示該單元 自由傳送訊息向下至互連結構1 3 1 0之線N。閂鎖1 3 1 6也 用於控制通過單元之後續訊息資料位元的流通。如前面所 討論,當一訊號自左向下發送時,允許來自線N 1310之 上層的另一訊息進入該單元,其中該訊號於線E 1 304中 向右發送。 在第13B圖中,訊息自線W 1302左邊進入控制單元 1 3 00。該標頭之最高有效位元208及來自下層之線BS上 之佔用訊號爲控制單元所檢查。以訊息MSB 208表示訊 息無法掉落,或是在線BS 1 306上之佔用訊號爲訊號値 ONE以表示訊息爲下面所阻擋。在第13B圖的實例中, 這些情況之其中一個或兩者爲真的。訊息D向右發送通 過延遲元件D1和D0而至輸出線E 1 3 04。閂鎖13 16設定 爲ONE。在線BN之佔用訊號1 308連接至訊號値爲ONE 之閂鎖1316。佔用訊號1 308被傳送至上面的單元以表示 其被阻擋向下傳送訊號。輸出線S 1312設爲ZERO,其 相當於不向下傳送訊號。 控制單元詳細說明和流程圖 第1 4圖爲說明控制訊息流通通過一控制單元1 3 0 0方 法的流程圖。第15A圖爲第14圖的流程圖所描述之控制 單元的一較佳實施例的詳細說明圖。 請參閱第13A和13B圖,控制單元1 300的兩種狀態 顯示於個別方塊圖中。第13A圖顯示訊息自左邊向下移527798 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Description () 1316 (—bit register). The occupancy signal passes a ZER0 up to line BN 1 3 08, which is connected to the latch output. This means that the unit is free to send messages down to line N 3 1 0 of the interconnect structure. The latch 1 3 1 6 is also used to control the flow of subsequent data bits through the unit. As previously discussed, when a signal is sent from left to down, another message from the upper layer of line N 1310 is allowed to enter the unit, where the signal is sent to the right on line E 1304. In Fig. 13B, the message enters the control unit 1 3 00 from the left of the line W 1302. The most significant bit 208 of the header and the occupancy signal on the lower line BS are checked by the control unit. The message MSB 208 indicates that the message cannot be dropped, or the occupied signal on the online BS 1 306 is the signal 値 ONE indicates that the message is blocked below. In the example of Figure 13B, one or both of these cases are true. The message D is transmitted to the right through the delay elements D1 and D0 to the output line E 1 3 04. Latch 13 16 is set to ONE. The occupied signal 1308 of the online BN is connected to the latch 1316 of the signal ONE. The occupation signal 1 308 is transmitted to the upper unit to indicate that it is blocked from transmitting the signal downward. The output line S 1312 is set to ZERO, which is equivalent to not transmitting a signal downward. Detailed description and flowchart of the control unit Fig. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a method of controlling message flow through a control unit 1300. Fig. 15A is a detailed explanatory diagram of a preferred embodiment of the control unit described in the flowchart of Fig. 14; Referring to Figures 13A and 13B, the two states of the control unit 1 300 are shown in separate block diagrams. Figure 13A shows the message moving down from the left
52 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4疋枱(210X297々i"T (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)52 This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 疋 台 (210X297々i " T (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)
79 7 2 5 經漪部中央標嗥局員工消费合作社印製 A7 __一___B7 五、發明説明() 動至底下一層的狀態。第1 3B圖顯示訊息在相同層自左 邊向右移動的狀態。第13A圖也表示沒有自左邊而來的 訊息的狀態。 請參閱第14圖並配合第12A,13A和13B圖。當閂鎖 設定訊號1 328達高狀態1404時,在控制單元的延遲元件 以及輸入線W 1 302和阻擋訊號線BS 1 306中可獲得決定 訊息方向1406所需的必要資料。尤其,當閂鎖設定訊號 達高狀態時,訊息通訊位元202被保留在延遲元件D1 1324 且標頭最高有效位元存在於輸入線W 1 3 02上。三種可能 的結果1408,1410和1412導因於訊息方向決定的測試。 首先,自左而來之訊息是存在的並爲下層所阻擋,或者訊 息標頭表示訊息必須向右移動1 408。其次,沒有存在自 左邊而來的訊息1 4 1 0。第三,自左而來之訊息存在且並 未爲下層所阻擋,以及訊息標頭表示訊息必須向下移動 1412 ° 後面兩個情況(即沒有存在自左邊而來的訊息1410 或當訊息向下移動1 4 1 2,以佔用訊號至上層之單一情況 來處理。在此二情況的其中一種,閂鎖1 3 1 6設定爲ZERO 且閂鎖輸出向上傳送至上面的單元。亦即,控制輸出BN 1 3 08總是連接1402至閂鎖1316。在訊息存在且必須向右 移動1 408的其他情況當中,閂鎖設定爲ONE。可使用該 閂鎖來儲存單元的控制狀態以及後續控制具有個別訊息週 期之單元邏輯閘。 請參閱第14圖並配合第10圖,在訊息存在且向右移 53 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規枋(210Χ 297々^ ) (許先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)79 7 2 5 Printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 __ 一 ___B7 V. Description of the invention () Move to the bottom level. Figure 1 3B shows the state where the message moves from left to right on the same layer. Fig. 13A also shows a state where there is no message from the left. Refer to Figure 14 and match Figures 12A, 13A and 13B. When the latch setting signal 1 328 reaches the high state 1404, the necessary information required to determine the message direction 1406 can be obtained in the delay element of the control unit, as well as the input line W 1 302 and the blocking signal line BS 1 306. In particular, when the latch setting signal reaches the high state, the message communication bit 202 is retained on the delay element D1 1324 and the most significant bit of the header exists on the input line W 1 3 02. Three possible results 1408, 1410, and 1412 are due to tests that determine the direction of the message. First, the message from the left is present and blocked by the lower layer, or the message header indicates that the message must be moved to the right by 1 408. Second, there is no message 1 4 1 0 from the left. Third, the message from the left exists and is not blocked by the lower layer, and the message header indicates that the message must be moved downward by 1412 ° The latter two cases (that is, there is no message from the left 1410 or when the message is downward Move 1 4 1 2 to deal with the single case of occupying the signal to the upper layer. In one of these two cases, the latch 1 3 1 6 is set to ZERO and the latch output is sent upward to the upper unit. That is, the control output BN 1 3 08 is always connected to 1402 to latch 1316. In other cases where the message is present and must be moved to the right 1 408, the latch is set to ONE. This latch can be used to store the control state of the unit and subsequent controls are individual The unit logic gate of the message cycle. Please refer to Figure 14 and cooperate with Figure 10. When the message exists and move to the right 53 This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 Regulations (210 × 297々 ^) (Xu Xian read the back (Notes for filling in this page)
、1T f, 527798 經濟部中央標準局負工消費合作社印製 A7__^五、發明説明() 動的特殊情況,最高有效位元208自標頭中去除,於是在 標頭位址之下一個位元1 054於是變成在下層之最高有效 位元。該訊號値ONE被向下傳送1412達一時脈週期 1414,使得線S 13 12上的訊號被設定爲ONE而產生向下 訊息的通訊位元202。在下個時脈週期1414,所欲之新最 高有效位元204 (以前的位元1 054 )被傳送至在輸出線N 1310之底下一層之單元。在完成週期1414時,輸出線 W向下連接通過線S 1416,使其他訊息流通通過控制單 兀’直至該問鎖設疋訊號再度達筒狀態1404。該下個最 高有效位元1 054立刻跟隨通訊位元202,因而去除現在 的最高有效位元208且有利於允許訊息時序跳至在此層的 訊息之前以配合下層訊息的時序,因而提前一個時脈週 期。以設定所有延遲元件和閂鎖爲ZERO之一開始或重置 訊號1420來起始化控制單元1 500。第14圖的流程圖描 述控制一具有單一向下路徑和至右之單元。第18A,18B 和1 8C圖所描述之一平坦潛候期單元由一般化流程圖來 控制,其中一起檢查多重輸入路徑且額外考量相同層之優 先權。 第12A和12B圖所示之閂鎖設定訊號的相對時序顯示 在下層1204之訊息比上層1206之訊息提前一個時脈週 期。因此,一向下訊息跳至該訊息的現在時序之前一個時 脈週期。再者,標頭長度的減短導致另一跳躍至前一個時 脈週期。第13A圖所示意之步驟1412,1414和1416的 效果爲執行所欲之標頭長度縮減且向下訊息之通訊位元變 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂 54 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規枱(210X 297公益) 527798 A7 B7 五 、發明説明( 經濟部中央標隼局貝工消费合作社印製 成與下層之時序同步化。輸入線W 1302直接連接於線S 13 12,使得兩個延遲元件D1和DO被越過而達到提前訊 息時序二個時脈週期之所欲效果。 請參閱第15A圖並配合第11和13A圖,其更進一步 詳細說明控制單元1 300,如控制單元實施例1 500。單元 1 5 00爲一閘層圖顯示兩個延遲元件D1 1510和D0 1512, 閂鎖1 3 1 6,輸出和輸入連接線以及邏輯閘用以控制訊息 的流通。許多邏輯閘爲閂鎖1316所控制。當閂鎖設定爲 ONE,在線W 1 302上自左而來之訊息自左至右流通,自 線E 1 304離開。開關194可避免來自連接於線N 1310之 上面單元之訊息離開線E。當閂鎖設定爲ZERO,自左而 來之訊息向下流通而離開線S 1 3 1 2。閂鎖1 3 1 6的値總是 被向上傳送通過線BN 1 308以指示上面的單元是否可以 向下傳送訊息。來自線N 1 3 1 0之上層之一訊息被允許藉 由線E 1 304而流向右。 請參閱第2圖和第7圖,一訊息進入連接至在底下一 層之一上列組或是下列組之一控制單元。該通訊位元202 表示訊息是否存在。若該通訊位元爲ZERO,那麼沒有訊 息存在且控制路徑與實際向下訊息相同。該標頭之最高有 效位元208表示指定之目的地。尤其,値ONE表示在上 列組之目標,而値ZERO表示在下列組之目標。 本紙張尺度適州中國國家標卒(CNS ) Λ4規格(210X297公釐) (¾先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)、 1T f, 527798 A7 __ ^ printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. The special case of the invention (the most significant bit 208 is removed from the header, so it is one bit below the header address Element 1 054 then becomes the most significant bit in the lower layer. The signal 値 ONE is transmitted downward 1412 for a clock period 1414, so that the signal on line S 13 12 is set to ONE to generate a communication bit 202 of a downward message. In the next clock cycle 1414, the desired new most significant bit 204 (previous bit 1 054) is transmitted to the unit below the output line N 1310. When the cycle 1414 is completed, the output line W is downwardly connected through the line S 1416 to allow other messages to flow through the control unit 'until the interrogation signal again reaches the state 1404. The next most significant bit 1 054 immediately follows the communication bit 202, thus removing the current most significant bit 208 and helping to allow the message timing to jump before the message in this layer to match the timing of the message in the lower layer. Pulse cycle. The control unit 1 500 is initialized by setting all delay elements and latches to one of the ZERO start or reset signals 1420. The flowchart of Figure 14 describes controlling a cell with a single downward path and to the right. One of the flat latency units described in Figures 18A, 18B, and 18C is controlled by a generalized flowchart in which multiple input paths are checked together and the priority of the same layer is additionally considered. The relative timing of the latch setting signal shown in Figures 12A and 12B is shown in the lower layer 1204 message one clock cycle ahead of the upper layer 1206 message. Therefore, a downward message jumps to a clock cycle before the current timing of the message. Furthermore, the shortening of the header length causes another jump to the previous clock cycle. The effect of steps 1412, 1414, and 1416 shown in Figure 13A is to perform the desired reduction of the header length and change the communication bit of the downward message (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). Order 54 paper sizes Applicable to Chinese National Standards (CNS) Λ4 regulation (210X 297 public welfare) 527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (Printed by the Bayer Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standardization Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and synchronized with the timing of the lower layer. Input line W 1302 is directly connected Line S 13 12 enables the two delay elements D1 and DO to be crossed to achieve the desired effect of two clock cycles in advance of the timing of the message. Please refer to FIG. 15A and cooperate with FIGS. 11 and 13A, which further describe the control unit in more detail. 1 300, such as control unit example 1 500. Unit 1 500 is a gate diagram showing two delay elements D1 1510 and D0 1512, latches 1 3 1 6, output and input connection lines and logic gates to control messages Many logic gates are controlled by latch 1316. When the latch is set to ONE, messages from left on line W 1 302 circulate from left to right and leave from line E 1 304. Switch 194 can avoid coming from the connection On line N 1310 The message from the above unit leaves the line E. When the latch is set to ZERO, the message from the left flows downwards and leaves the line S 1 3 1 2. The 値 of the latch 1 3 1 6 is always transmitted upward through the line BN 1 308 to indicate whether the above unit can send messages downwards. One message from the upper layer of line N 1 3 1 0 is allowed to flow to the right through line E 1 304. See Figure 2 and Figure 7, a message enters Connect to a control unit in one of the groups listed below or one of the following groups. The communication bit 202 indicates whether a message exists. If the communication bit is ZERO, no message exists and the control path is the same as the actual downward message .The most significant bit of the header 208 indicates the designated destination. In particular, 値 ONE indicates the target in the above group, and 値 ZERO indicates the target in the following group. This paper size is suitable for China National Standards (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 mm) (¾Read the precautions on the back before filling this page)
5277% A7 B7 五 發明説明() 表二 一 控制單元狀態 標頭最高有效 位元(在線W) 通訊位元(在 D1) 連接至上列組 之控制單元 連接至上列組 之控制單元 0 0 向下(南) 向下 〇(至下面) 1 向右(東) 向下 _ U至上面) 1 |向下 向右 經满部中央標準局兵工消费合作社印製 表二綜合了兩種訊息位元的使用以決定訊息由那個方 向通過單元。當閂鎖設定訊號1 328達高狀態時,訊息通 訊位元在延遲元件D1 15 10以及該最高有效位元208在線 W 1 302。在具有最高有效位元設定爲ZERO (下面單元目 的地)的訊息進入一上連接單元的情況中,該訊息向右發 送且發出訊號給至上層之單元不要將訊息向下傳送.。或 者,若相同訊息進入一下連接單元且不爲下面所阻擋,則 向下發送該訊息。因此,相對於該標頭最高有效位元之値, 下和上連接單元之控制閘相互補。在使用連接至上列組之 單元1 500的情況中,使用閘極1 576。在連接至下列組之 單元的情況中,則使用閘極1 576。應注意的是因爲上連 接單元尋求ZERO以決定是否該訊息應向右移動,所以在 延遲元件D1之該通訊位元202必須被用來分辨實際往右 訊息和無訊息之情況。 在開關1 〇〇之一些實施例中,使用時序來決定何時訊 息離開第0層。在其他實施例,則使用行標頭212。第15B 圖顯示在第0層處理該行標頭之特殊控制單元。請參閱第 15B圖並配合第2B和12圖,當在行標頭所編碼之行數符 7、紙張尺中國囤家標潭((、NS ) Μ規格(210X 297公釐) (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂 527798 A7 ____B7五、發明説明() 經系‘部中央標準局兵Η消费合作社印製 合控制單元之行數時,一包含一行標頭2 1 2之訊息200離 開第〇層之控制單元1 550。當閂鎖設定訊號1 328變成高 狀態時,該標頭邏輯1 5 68同時檢視控制位元202及行標 頭之所有位元。若該標頭位址符合單元所在位置的行數以 及該訊息未被下面所阻擋1 556,則向下發送該訊息1 562。 爲避免行標頭212輸出,至下層15 62之線S連接至第一 有效載荷位元206。閂鎖1 566儲存單元的狀態且以類似 形式控制訊息流通至單元1 500之閂鎖1316。 _ 高速時序及桦制 第12A圖爲開關100之實施例的時序圖,其中訊息標 頭位元以每層一個時間週期1202之速度向下移動通過該 開關。第13B圖表示在一列中向右移動的訊息通過兩個 延遲元件1102,以致使用兩個時間週期向右移動至下一 個單元。第16A圖爲設計用來減少潛候期之開關1〇〇之 另一實施例的時序圖。在此實施例中,在一給定行的所有 層接收相同閂鎖設定訊號16Ό4,1 606和1608等等。在此 實施例中,訊息標頭和在一列中向右移動之訊息有效載荷 位元只通過一個延遲元件,因此只使用一時間週期1110 向右移動。標頭位元使用一時間週期向下移動至下一層。 向下移動之有效載荷位元直接連接至下層之單元且延遲少 於一時脈週期。該延遲是指單元內少數閘極的傳播延遲。 請參閱第16B圖,其顯示在相鄰層相'同行之兩個高速 控制單元1 620和1 622的連接。在時間週期1202開始及 閂鎖設定訊號1 604達高狀態時,自左1 302進入之訊息的 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ,\一5 本紙張尺度適州中國國家標率((’NS ) Λ4規格(210X29*7公釐) 527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 通訊位元202和MSB 208分別在線W 1302和延遲元件DO 1618。電路1612之三個閘極隨佔用訊號BS 1 306値處理 這些位元,並立刻向上13 08傳送結果至電路1614。同樣 地,電路1614向上傳送其輸出13 08至上面一層。在最底 層之電路1614穩定下來,首先向上傳送輸出及以起漣波 方式設定上面的電路。電路1614之傳播延遲乘以層數小 於一個時脈週期1202。當閂鎖設定訊號1604達高狀態且 捕獲控制單元1620之狀態時,所有電路穩定下來。 32-埠開關 請參閱第17圖並配合第1A圖,一 32-埠開關之實施 例有四層 1702,1 704,1 706 和 1 708 以及四行 1780,1782, 1 784和1 786。一層包括8-列3 60。在實施例中的埠數爲 每層之列數(8)乘以行數(4)。因此,舉例說明之開關包括 8*4 = 32個輸入埠104和32個輸出埠154。爲簡化開關1700 之描述,所以省略第17圖之一些元件,例如FIFO緩衝 器114和選擇的輸入和輸出控制結構110和150。 經濟部中央標準局負工消費合作社印^. (¾先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 請參閱第17圖並配合第3圖,排列控制單元之簡便 方法包括先選擇單行,並且該行之每層以同一組態3 4 0配 置控制單元。在此實例中選擇最左邊一行,第0行1780。 在第0行1708,第3層1 702之開關陣列120具有排列成 同一組態之控制單元。在第0行之控制單元數字標示定義 爲該單元的列數。在第3層1 702之第0刿1710具有一控 制單元1712位於第一行1 780,且在單元中之數字標示 爲”〇”。同樣地,相同組態和標示放在第0行1780之其他 本纸張尺度適川中國國家標冷(CNS ) Λ4規格(210X297公釐) 527798 A7 B7 i、發明説明() 所有層。 在完成第〇行的排列後,爲下一步驟在開關佈局中選 擇一層,可選擇任何層,但最方便是先選擇最上層,亦即 在此實例中之第3層1702。該控制單元以同一組態排列 而橫跨第3層。在控制單元中之數字標示源自於一配置序 列。請參閱第6A圖和第9圖,爲開關1 700選擇一 8-列 配置序列614,其他8-列序列如序列60 8或624同樣可以 選擇。使用序列614,第3層之第0列1710在位置0上 具有第一控制單元。控制單元1 300或是起漣波紋單元1620 可用於該開關陣列120中。在圖示說明之實施例中,在第 〇層上面開關的所有單元爲相同型式的開關。在第0列之 單元編號來自序列614(0,4,2,6,1,5,3,7,0,···),其決定向下 連接的列634。因此,在第0列(1712,1714,1 71 6和1718) 之單元編號分別爲〇,4,2和6。第1列1720之第一單元在 位置1,以致在列(1722,1724,1 726和1 728)之單元編號爲 1,5,3,7。相同左至右佈局方法被用來編號第3層1702之 剩餘列之控制單元。 開關1700的佈局之下一步驟爲在剛完成之層的下面 一層配置控制單元,亦即第2層1704。在第3層1702之 控制單元號碼表示第2層之控制單元的配置地方。在第3 層,第0列1710,第1行1 782,控制單元1714編號爲4, 其表示在相對下層1 744之單元配置在第U列。持續自左 至右,單元1716編號爲”2”,其表示在相對下層1744之 第2層單元配置在第2列。在最上層底下之所有控制單元 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標卒(CNS ) Λ4規格(210X297公釐) (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本買) 訂 經滴部中央標率局負工消费合作社印裂 527798 A7 B7___ 五、發明説明() 的列位置由上層之單元編號數所決定。 下一步驟爲配置在第2層1 704之單元的編號。第2 層 1704 包括兩個列組 1 750。下列組序列爲 (0,2,1,3,0,...)910。上列組序列以加4而獲得,結果得到 序列(4,6,5,7,4,...)912。使用上述方法編號第3層,在第2 層第0列1 730之單元編號爲0,2,1和3,其餘之下面列使 用相同序列和方法編號。第4列1740之單元編號爲4,6,5 和7,同樣用於第2層之其餘上列組。 在第1層1706之單元同樣使用在其上之單元的號碼 來配置。第1層之單元編號使用四個2-列序列 (0,1,0,...),(2,3,2,..),(4,5,4,..)和(6,7,6,..)918。第0層1708 (最底層)也是同樣佈局,也就是說,以使用上面單元的 號碼來配置控制單元於適當列中。在第〇層1708,控制 單元的編號爲列數,其也決定了輸出埠1 54的編號。 經浐部中夾i?.^-XJh工消费合作衫卬^ (^先閱讀背面之注意事項再镇寫本頁) 總而言之,開關1〇〇之實施例的璋數由選擇每層之行 數164和列數來決定。列數R較佳爲,其中L+1爲層 數。最方便是先以相同組態來佈局單元,自最左邊的行 1 7 80,第0行且橫跨最上層1 702。在第0行之單元編號 與列數相同。在開關陣列1 20中剩餘單元的配置是以左至 右頂至底序列來進行。在一列之單元編號由該層之配置序 列所決定。在頂層下面之單元配置由向上之單元數所決 定。在第〇層之編號與列數相同,並定義成輸出埠的數目。 平坦-潛候期捋制單元狀態 請參閱第18A,18B和18C圖,具有兩個自左1 802而 60 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 527798 好浐部中^i?.^*XJh.T消抡合作私印父 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 來之輸入,兩個自上層1804而來之輸入,兩個至右1806 之輸出及兩個向下1 808之輸出的一控制單元1 800稱爲平 坦-潛候期控制單元。自左1802而來之輸入線標示爲線W1 和W2,自上1 804而來之輸入線標示爲線N1和N2,至 右1 806之輸出線標示爲線E1和E2,以及往下1 808之輸 出線標示爲線S1和S2。控制單元1 800另有二個至上層 之佔用訊號輸出線1810,如第18A圖之標示線BN ;並且 接收來自下層之二個佔用訊號輸出線1812,如第18A圖 之標示線BS。在第1 8A圖之狀態7實例中只顯示一個佔 用訊號輸出線BS 1812。 七種允許之連接狀態(編號由1至7 ) 1 830起因於平 坦-潛候期控制單元1 800之操作。輸入線W2可連接至相 同列之向下輸出線S 1 1 820,向下輸出線S2 1822或向右 輸出線E2 1 824。同樣地,輸入線W1可連接於相同列之 向下輸出線S 1 1 826,向下輸出線S2 1 822或向右輸出線 E1。向下輸出線S 1 1 820連接至下面一層之上列組,以及 輸出線S2連接至下面一層之下列組。輸入線W1和W2 連接至相同向下輸出線是不被允許的1 828。當線W1不 連接至線E1時,來自上層之輸入線N1連接至向右之輸 出線E1 1 834。當線W2不連接至線E2時,輸入線N2連 接至輸出線E2 1 836。亦即,線W1在使用輸出線E1上 優先於輸入線N1,且同樣地,線W2在使用輸出線E2上 .優先於輸入線N2。當輸入線W1連接至輸出線E1時,藉 由適當連接線BN向上傳送一佔用訊號181〇至上層,且 61 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) (許先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)5277% A7 B7 Five invention description () Table 21 Control unit status header Most significant bit (online W) Communication bit (at D1) Control unit connected to the upper group Control unit connected to the upper group 0 0 Down (South) downwards 0 (to the bottom) 1 right (east) downwards _ U to the top) 1 | downwards to the right, printed by Manchuria Central Standards Bureau Ordnance and Consumer Cooperatives, table 2 combines two types of message bits To determine which direction the message passes through the unit. When the latch setting signal 1 328 reaches the high state, the message bit is at the delay element D1 15 10 and the most significant bit 208 is on line W 1 302. In the case where the message with the most significant bit set to ZERO (the location of the unit below) enters an upper connection unit, the message is sent to the right and a signal is sent to the unit to the upper layer. Do not send the message down. Or, if the same message enters the connection unit and is not blocked below, the message is sent downward. Therefore, relative to the highest significant bit of the header, the control gates of the lower and upper connection units are complementary. In the case of using unit 1 500 connected to the above group, gate 1 576 is used. In the case of units connected to the following groups, gate 1 576 is used. It should be noted that because the upper link unit seeks ZERO to determine whether the message should move to the right, the communication bit 202 in the delay element D1 must be used to distinguish between the actual right message and the absence of the message. In some embodiments of switch 1000, timing is used to decide when a message leaves layer 0. In other embodiments, the row header 212 is used. Figure 15B shows the special control unit that processes the header of this row at level 0. Please refer to Figure 15B in conjunction with Figures 2B and 12, when the line number coded in the header of the line is 7, the paper rule Chinese storehouse standard pool ((, NS)) M specifications (210X 297 mm) (read first read Note on the back, please fill in this page again.) Order 527798 A7 ____B7 V. Description of the invention () When the number of rows of the control unit printed by the Department of Economics' Central Standards Bureau Bingye Consumer Cooperative, a message including a header 2 1 2 200 leaves the control unit 1 550 of the 0th level. When the latch setting signal 1 328 goes high, the header logic 1 5 68 simultaneously checks all bits of the control bit 202 and the row header. If the header bit The number of lines that match the location of the unit and the message is not blocked by 1 556 below, then the message is sent down 1 562. To avoid the output of the row header 212, the line S to the lower layer 15 62 is connected to the first payload bit Element 206. The latch 1 566 stores the state of the unit and controls the message flow to the latch 1316 of the unit 1 500 in a similar form. _ High-speed timing and birch Figure 12A is a timing diagram of an embodiment of the switch 100, in which the message header Bits go down at a rate of 1202 per time period Move through the switch. Figure 13B shows the message moving to the right in a column through two delay elements 1102, so that it uses two time periods to move right to the next unit. Figure 16A is designed to reduce latency Timing diagram of another embodiment of the switch 100. In this embodiment, all layers in a given row receive the same latch setting signals 16Ό4, 1 606, 1608, etc. In this embodiment, the message flag The header and the message payload bits moving to the right in a row pass only one delay element, and therefore use only a time period of 1110 to move to the right. The header bits use one time period to move down to the next layer. The payload bit is directly connected to the lower-level cell with a delay of less than one clock period. The delay refers to the propagation delay of a few gates in the cell. See Figure 16B, which shows two high-speed peers in adjacent layers. Control unit 1 620 and 1 622. At the beginning of time period 1202 and the latch setting signal 1 604 reaches the high state, the message entered from left 1 302 (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) ), \ One 5 This paper is the standard state of China in China (('NS) Λ4 specification (210X29 * 7mm) 527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () Communication bits 202 and MSB 208 are online W 1302 and delay respectively Element DO 1618. The three gates of circuit 1612 process these bits with the occupation signal BS 1 306 値 and immediately transfer the result to circuit 1314. Similarly, the circuit 1614 transmits its output 13 08 to the upper layer. The lowest circuit 1614 stabilizes, first transmitting the output upward and setting the above circuit in a ripple manner. The propagation delay of circuit 1614 multiplied by the number of layers is less than one clock cycle 1202. When the latch setting signal 1604 reaches the high state and the state of the capture control unit 1620, all the circuits stabilize. 32-port switch Refer to Figure 17 and in conjunction with Figure 1A, an embodiment of a 32-port switch has four layers 1702, 1 704, 1 706 and 1 708 and four rows 1780, 1782, 1 784 and 1 786. One layer consists of 8-columns 3 to 60. The number of ports in the embodiment is the number of columns (8) per row multiplied by the number of rows (4). Therefore, the illustrated switch includes 8 * 4 = 32 input ports 104 and 32 output ports 154. To simplify the description of the switch 1700, some components of FIG. 17 such as the FIFO buffer 114 and selected input and output control structures 110 and 150 are omitted. Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives ^. (¾Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Please refer to Figure 17 and cooperate with Figure 3. The easy way to arrange the control units includes selecting a single row first, and the row The control units are configured with the same configuration on each floor. In this example, the leftmost row is selected, and the 0th row is 1780. In the 0th row 1708, the 3rd layer 1 702 switch array 120 has control units arranged in the same configuration. The control unit numerical designation at line 0 is defined as the number of columns of the unit. A control unit 1712 on the third layer 1 702 from 0 to 1710 is located in the first row 1 780, and the number in the unit is marked as "0". Similarly, the same configuration and markings are placed on line 0 of 1780. The paper size is suitable for Sichuan National Standard Cold (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 mm) 527798 A7 B7 i. Description of the invention () All layers. After finishing the 0th row, select a layer in the switch layout for the next step. You can choose any layer, but it is most convenient to select the top layer first, which is the third layer 1702 in this example. The control units are arranged in the same configuration across the 3rd floor. The digital designation in the control unit is derived from a configuration sequence. Referring to Figures 6A and 9, select an 8-column configuration sequence 614 for switch 1700. Other 8-column sequences such as sequence 60 8 or 624 can also be selected. Using sequence 614, the third column 010 1710 has a first control unit at position 0. The control unit 1 300 or the ripple unit 1620 can be used in the switch array 120. In the illustrated embodiment, all units that are switched above the 0th layer are switches of the same type. The cell number in column 0 comes from the sequence 614 (0,4,2,6,1,5,3,7,0, ...), which determines the column 634 connected downwards. Therefore, the unit numbers in column 0 (1712, 1714, 1 71 6 and 1718) are 0, 4, 2 and 6, respectively. The first cell in column 1720 is at position 1, so that the cells in columns (1722, 1724, 1 726 and 1 728) are numbered 1, 5, 3, 7. The same left-to-right layout method is used to number the control units of the remaining columns of layer 1702. The next step in the layout of the switch 1700 is to configure the control unit, which is the second layer 1704, below the layer just completed. The control unit number on the third floor 1702 indicates the place where the control unit on the second floor is arranged. On the third layer, the 0th column 1710, the first row 1 782, and the control unit 1714 are numbered 4, which indicates that the unit located in the lower layer 1 744 is arranged in the U column. Continued from left to right, the unit 1716 is numbered "2", which means that the unit on the second layer relative to the lower layer 1744 is arranged in the second column. All the control units under the top layer are in accordance with the Chinese National Standards (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 mm) (read the precautions on the back before filling in the purchase). Cooperative print 527798 A7 B7___ 5. The column position of the description of the invention () is determined by the number of units in the upper layer. The next step is the numbering of the units arranged on the second layer 1 704. Level 2 1704 includes two column groups 1 750. The following group sequence is (0,2,1,3,0, ...) 910. The sequence of the above group is obtained by adding 4, and the sequence (4,6,5,7,4, ...) is 912. The above method is used to number the third layer, and the unit numbers in the 0th column 1 730 of the second layer are 0, 2, 1 and 3, and the rest of the lower columns use the same sequence and method number. The unit numbers of column 1740 in column 4 are 4,6,5 and 7, which are also used in the rest of the above group in layer 2. Units on layer 1 1706 are also configured using the number of the unit above them. Cell numbering on level 1 uses four 2-column sequences (0,1,0, ...), (2,3,2, ..), (4,5,4, ..) and (6, 7,6, ..) 918. The 0th layer 1708 (lowest layer) has the same layout, that is, the control units are arranged in the appropriate columns with the numbers of the above units. On the 0th layer 1708, the number of the control unit is the number of columns, which also determines the number of the output ports 154. I?. ^-XJh industrial and consumer cooperation shirt in the warp section ^ (^ read the precautions on the back before writing this page) In short, the number of the embodiment of the switch 100 is determined by the number of rows per layer 164 and the number of columns. The number of columns R is preferably, where L + 1 is the number of layers. It is most convenient to lay out the cells first with the same configuration, starting from the leftmost row 1 7 80, line 0 and spanning the topmost 1 702. The number of cells in row 0 is the same as the number of columns. The remaining cells in the switch array 120 are arranged in a left-to-right top-to-bottom sequence. The unit numbers in a row are determined by the arrangement sequence of the layer. The configuration of the units below the top layer is determined by the number of units going up. The number on the 0th layer is the same as the number of rows and is defined as the number of output ports. The flat-latency control unit status is shown in Figures 18A, 18B, and 18C. There are two from 1 802 to 60 from the left. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm) 527798. ^ i?. ^ * XJh.T eliminates the cooperation and private printing father A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () Inputs from the two, two inputs from the upper layer 1804, two outputs to the right 1806 and two down 1 A control unit 1 800 output from 808 is called a flat-latency control unit. Input lines from left 1802 are labeled lines W1 and W2, input lines from top 1 804 are labeled lines N1 and N2, and output lines to right 1 806 are labeled lines E1 and E2, and down 1 808. The output lines are labeled as lines S1 and S2. The control unit 1 800 also has two occupied signal output lines 1810 to the upper layer, such as the marked line BN in FIG. 18A; and receives two occupied signal output lines 1812 from the lower layer, such as the marked line BS in FIG. 18A. In the example of state 7 in Fig. 18A, only one occupied signal output line BS 1812 is displayed. Seven permitted connection states (numbered from 1 to 7) 1 830 are due to the operation of the flat-latency control unit 1 800. Input line W2 can be connected to downward output line S 1 1 820, downward output line S2 1822, or rightward output line E2 1 824 in the same column. Similarly, the input line W1 may be connected to the downward output line S 1 1 826, the downward output line S2 1 822, or the right output line E1 in the same column. The downward output line S 1 1 820 is connected to the upper group of the lower layer, and the output line S2 is connected to the following group of the lower layer. Input lines W1 and W2 connected to the same downward output line are not allowed 1 828. When the line W1 is not connected to the line E1, the input line N1 from the upper layer is connected to the output line E1 1 834 to the right. When line W2 is not connected to line E2, input line N2 is connected to output line E2 1 836. That is, the line W1 has priority over the use of the output line E1 over the input line N1, and similarly, the line W2 has priority over the use of the output line E2. It takes precedence over the input line N2. When the input line W1 is connected to the output line E1, an appropriate signal B18 is transmitted upward to the upper layer through a suitable connection line BN, and 61 paper standards are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) (read first) (Notes on the back then fill out this page)
527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明() (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 同樣地發生在輸入線W2連接至輸出線E2。當一向下輸 出線不連接於來自左邊的輸入線如線S1時,表示無訊息 存在之値ZERO向下傳送1 832。 平坦-潛候期控制表 請參閱第18B圖並配合第18A圖,顯示平坦-潛候期 控制單元1 800的狀態1 830,衍生自控制表1 840前四攔所 示之項目狀態或値。由線W1 1 842進入控制單元1 800之 訊息的標頭位址決定訊息向下移動,藉由線S1至下面一 層之上列組或藉由線S2至下列組。標頭位址以相同方式 操作使訊息進入線W2 1 844。若此二訊息指向列組的上半 部或指向下半部,那麼在線W1之訊息較線W2之訊息更 具優先權,且不允許後者向下移動而是向右移動。進入線 W1之訊息之方向以檢查其標頭MSB 204來決定,如第一 攔1 842所表示,而第二欄則用於在線W2之訊息。在無 訊息於線W1或W2的情況下,以”none”標示。平坦-潛候 i 期控制單元1 800總是連接至上和下列組。 也請參閱第3圖,可阻擋至下層316之路徑,如對應 之佔用訊號33 0所表示。在第18A圖中,至下層316之 線S1和S2 1 808的二個路徑由線BS 1812上之二個佔用 訊號所控制。在表1 840中,二個佔用訊號1 8 1 2之狀態分 別顯示於第三欄1846和第四欄1 848。至下面一層之上列 組之輸出線S1在第三欄1 846中以”1”表示佔用(阻擋), 或者以”〇”表示不佔用,且同樣用於第四欄1 848之線S2。 以”na”標示”not applicable”表示一訊息未指向特定之上或 ---62_ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210X297公釐) 527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 下列組。 表1 840之第一列描述在線wr和W2上之訊息較佳向 下移至上列組1 842,1 844且至上列之路徑未被阻擋,在 欄1 846中以”0’表示。在線W1之訊息具有優先權,因此 連接至輸出線S1而至上列組,如欄1 850所示。在線W2 之訊息經由線E2指向右,如欄1 852所示。此連接狀態 顯示於表1 840之第五欄及第18A圖之狀態5 1 830。在表 1 840之下一列描述與第一列相同的狀況,除了線S1爲下 層所阻擋,因此此二訊息朝右至各個列,此以狀態71830 表示。在線W1或W2上無訊息之狀況下,個別輸入線連 接至一可獲得知向下輸出線S1或S2,以避免訊息向下傳 送1 832以及避免個別輸入線爲上層1 804所阻擋。相同地, 向下輸出直接連接至訊號値ZERO 1 832。 表1 842顯示表1 840之前四欄中的項目値決定平坦-潛 候期控制單元1 800的狀態1 830。該控制單元1 800的狀 態1 830決定閂鎖T1和B1所設定之値,如第六和七欄1854 所示,以及決定閂鎖T1和B2所設定之値如第九和十欄 1 8 5 6所示。 平坦-潛候期邏輯詳細說明 請參閱第18C圖並配合第18B圖,其顯示部份平坦-潛候期控制單元邏輯之實施例。省略設定表1 840所編號 之閂鎖的邏輯。閂鎖T1和B 1 1 854以及閂鎖T1和B2 1856 控制來自輸入埠W 1,W2,N 1和N2之任何訊息的發送。 此外,在線BN 1 1 875和BN2 1 877上之佔用訊號的輸出 ______ 63 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) (誚先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () (Read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The same happens when the input line W2 is connected to the output line E2. When a downward output line is not connected to an input line from the left, such as line S1, it means that no message exists. ZERO transmits 1 832 downwards. Flat-latency control table Please refer to FIG. 18B and cooperate with FIG. 18A to display the status of the flat-latency control unit 1 800 1 830, which is derived from the status of the items shown in the first four blocks of control table 1 840 or 値. The header address of the message that enters the control unit 1 800 from line W1 1 842 determines that the message moves downwards, through line S1 to the upper layer group below, or through line S2 to the following group. The header address operates in the same way to bring the message into line W2 1 844. If the two messages point to the upper half or the lower half of the column, then the message on line W1 has priority over the message on line W2, and the latter is not allowed to move down but to the right. The direction of the message entering line W1 is determined by checking its header MSB 204, as indicated by the first block 1 842, and the second column is used for the message of line W2. When there is no message on line W1 or W2, it is marked with "none". The flat-latency i control unit 1 800 is always connected to the upper and lower groups. Please also refer to Figure 3, which can block the path to the lower layer 316, as indicated by the corresponding occupation signal 33 0. In Fig. 18A, the two paths to the lines S1 and S2 1 808 to the lower layer 316 are controlled by two occupancy signals on the line BS 1812. In Table 1 840, the states of the two occupied signals 1 8 1 2 are shown in the third column 1846 and the fourth column 1 848, respectively. The output line S1 of the group above the lower layer is "1" in the third column 1846 for occupation (blocking), or "0" for no occupation, and is also used for the line S2 in column 4 of 1848. Use "na" to indicate "not applicable" to indicate that a message does not point to a specific or --- 62_ This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 mm) 527798 A7 B7 V. Description of invention () The following group . The first column of Table 1 840 describes the information on the lines wr and W2. It is preferred to move down to the above group 1 842, 1 844 and the path to the above column is not blocked, and is indicated by "0" in column 1 846. Online W1 The message has priority, so it is connected to the output line S1 to the above group, as shown in column 1 850. The message on line W2 points to the right via line E2, as shown in column 1 852. This connection status is shown in table 1 840 The fifth column and the state of Figure 18A are 5 1 830. The column below Table 1 840 describes the same situation as the first column, except that line S1 is blocked by the lower layer, so the two messages go to the right to each column, and this is the state 71830 means. When there is no message on the line W1 or W2, the individual input lines are connected to a known downward output line S1 or S2 to prevent the message from being transmitted downwards 1 832 and to prevent the individual input lines from being blocked by the upper layer 1 804 . Similarly, the down output is directly connected to the signal 値 ZERO 1 832. Table 1 842 shows the items in the four columns before Table 1 840. Determines the status of the flat-latency control unit 1 800. The control unit 1 800 State 1 830 determines which of the latches T1 and B1 is set, such as the sixth The seven columns are shown in 1854, and the settings set for determining the latches T1 and B2 are shown in columns 9 and 10 1 8 5 6. For a detailed description of the flat-latency logic, please refer to Figure 18C and cooperate with Figure 18B. An example of the logic of the flat-latency control unit is shown. Omitting the logic for setting the latches numbered in Table 1 840. Latches T1 and B 1 1 854 and latches T1 and B2 1856 control come from input port W 1, Send any message of W2, N 1 and N2. In addition, the output of the occupancy signal on the online BN 1 1 875 and BN2 1 877 ______ 63 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) ( (阅读 Read the notes on the back before filling out this page)
、1T 527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 値衍生自閂鎖。當輸出線E1爲訊息傳輸所佔用,在線BN1 1 8 75上之佔用訊號設定爲訊號値ONE,表示列E1爲佔用 的,且同樣地用於列E2之輸出和佔用訊號BN2 1 877。當 訊息200已進入平坦-潛候期控制單元1 800使得通訊位元 202儲存於延遲元件D0時,一閂鎖設定訊號(圖未示) 起始表1 840所定義之程序以達成四個閂鎖的設定。在一 時脈週期內執行程序有助於訊息200之連續位元向下或向 右發送。如第13A圖所描述,標頭之最高有效位元208 自向下移動之訊息中去除。 控制單元A 1 800連接至上層之單元B 1 800,使得單 元A之線BN1和線N1分別連接至單元B之線BS1和線 S1,且單元A之線BN2和線N2分別連接至上層之另一 單元C之線BS2和線S2 (圖未示)。在另一實例中,如 在第Q層之單元D,單元D之四條連接線BN1,Nl,BN2 和N2分別連接於至上層之單元F之線BS1,SI,BS2和 S2。單元A總是連接至單一單元G使得單元A之線E1 和E2分別連接至右邊而至單元G之線W1和W2。 平坦潛候期捽制單元符號 請參閱第18B圖和第18D圖,在線W1上之訊息優先 於在線W2上之訊息,亦即,若此二訊息指向下面線S1 或S2之相同未阻擋之列組目標,那麼在線W1上之訊息 具有優先權且被向下發送至線S1或S2之輸出,以及在 線W2上之訊息被發送至線E2。在控制單元1 800之一替 換型式中,線W2上之訊息優先於線W1上之訊息。此替 ,___64 ^^尺度適用中國國家標率((:灿)八4規格(210/ 297公釐j (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再镇寫本頁)1T 527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () 値 Derived from the latch. When output line E1 is occupied by message transmission, the occupied signal on line BN1 1 8 75 is set to signal 讯 ONE, which means that column E1 is occupied, and it is also used for output and occupied signal BN2 1 877 of column E2. When the message 200 has entered the flat-latency control unit 1 800 so that the communication bit 202 is stored in the delay element D0, a latch setting signal (not shown) starts the procedure defined in Table 1 840 to achieve four latches. Lock setting. Executing the program in a clock cycle helps to send consecutive bits of message 200 down or to the right. As described in FIG. 13A, the most significant bit 208 of the header is removed from the message moving downward. The control unit A 1 800 is connected to the upper unit B 1 800, so that the line BN1 and the line N1 of the unit A are respectively connected to the line BS1 and the line S1 of the unit B, and the lines BN2 and N2 of the unit A are respectively connected to the other upper layer. Line BS2 and line S2 of a unit C (not shown). In another example, as in the cell D in the Q layer, the four connection lines BN1, N1, BN2, and N2 of the cell D are connected to the lines BS1, SI, BS2, and S2 to the cell F in the upper layer, respectively. Cell A is always connected to a single cell G such that the lines E1 and E2 of cell A are connected to the right and lines W1 and W2 of cell G, respectively. See Figures 18B and 18D for flat latency control unit symbols. Messages on line W1 take precedence over messages on line W2, that is, if these two messages point to the same unblocked column below line S1 or S2 Group target, then the message on line W1 has priority and is sent down to the output of line S1 or S2, and the message on line W2 is sent to line E2. In an alternative version of the control unit 1 800, the message on line W2 takes precedence over the message on line W1. Instead, the ___64 ^^ scale applies to China's national standard ((: Can) 8 4 specifications (210/297 mm j (please read the precautions on the back before writing this page))
527798 A7 _B7__ 五、發明説明() (銷先閱讀背面之注意事項再楨寫本頁) 換控制單元之邏輯由表1 840中之交換線W1和W2及交 換線E1和E2所定義。當線W1優先於線W2時,第18D 圖爲平坦潛候期控制單元1800之符號代表1 880,以實黑 18 82表示優先權。在替換型式中,線W2優先於線W1, 底下的方塊爲實黑。在符號1 880之任一型式中,爲淸楚 起見,省略連接至上層和來自下層之佔用訊號。此簡明符 號用於簡化平坦潛候期開關之整個佈局的描述,說明於第 19圖。在一替代優先權方式,未圖示說明,在偶數行中 W1具有向上連接的優先權而W2有向下連接優先權,在 奇數行優先權則相反。 16乘4之平坦潛候期開關527798 A7 _B7__ 5. Description of the invention () (Please read the notes on the back before writing this page) The logic of the switching control unit is defined by the exchange lines W1 and W2 and exchange lines E1 and E2 in Table 1 When the line W1 has priority over the line W2, the figure 18D shows that the symbol of the flat latency control unit 1800 represents 1 880, and the solid black 18 82 represents the priority. In the replacement version, the line W2 takes precedence over the line W1, and the bottom square is solid black. In any type of symbol 1 880, for the sake of clarity, the occupation signals connected to the upper layer and from the lower layer are omitted. This concise symbol is used to simplify the description of the entire layout of the flat latency switch, as illustrated in Figure 19. In an alternative priority method, which is not illustrated, W1 has the priority of connecting upwards and W2 has the priority of connecting downwards in the even rows, and the opposite is the priority in the odd rows. 16 by 4 flat latency switch
請參閱第19圖並配合第1,3,6A,6C,18A,18C和18D 圖,其描述四行和四層之平坦-潛候期開關1900。每層包 含16列1 902,自0編號至15。平坦-潛候期控制單元1800 連接兩列和兩對垂直連接線,如第1 8A和1 8C圖所示。 現在說明控制陣列120中佈局單元1 800之方法,在 此描述與圖示中省略開關1〇〇之其他元件。開關1900之 輸入埠104數目爲列數(16)乘以行數(4)或爲64。輸 出埠154的數目與輸入埠數相同。 請參閱第M8A和18C圖,平坦-潛候期控制單元1800 具有兩個輸出至在線S1 18 70和S2 18 72之下層。因爲單 元1 800之此”雙重輸出”特性,所以第0層之控制單元不 用於平坦-潛候期開關的操作。 在開關陣列120中配置平坦-潛候期控制單元1 800的 ___________65 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明() (詞先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 方法包括先在最底層(所有行之第1層)以相同組態配置 單元。因此,控制單元沿著自開關陣列1 20之下左延伸至 上右之對角線配置。每層1902給予16列及每個單元1800 給予2列,因此一開關陣列使用16/2或8個單元。在這 對列之頂列具有優先權1 882之控制單元1 880沿著第0行 1910之控制陣列120之對角線配置。在下一行(第1行), 在底列具有優先權之控制單元用於塡滿控制陣列。自一行 更替至下一行之列優先權的方法用於開關1900佈局之其 餘部份。用於第1層上面所有層之第0行之其他控制陣列 包含與第1層相同之佈局,亦即,頂端優先權單元1882 之同等組態,此完成開關1 900之最左邊一行和最底層的 佈局。自第2層開始其餘開關陣列以左至右序列佈局於每 層中,且在一時間向上移動一層,直至完成最頂層。 在箱型區1916的號碼表示與控制單元1 800連接之至 下層之一對埠154之最低輸出埠數。顯示單元1910連接 至第0埠,且也連接至第1埠。在第19圖中省略數字”1”, 因爲空間受到限制且在佈局過程中不需要數字。在箱型區 1916的號碼用於幫助上面層之控制單元的配置。 也請參閱第9圖,在第2層,沿第〇列向右移動之訊 息依循序列(0,2,1,3,0,...)所指定之連接。第一單元1924 連接至下面的第0列和第2列。至右1 926之下個單元連 接至第1列和第3列。第1層和第2層之間的垂直互連圖 .樣1922形成符合序列910之連接。單元1924分別連接至 下層而至第一層第0列和第2列之單元。在下一行(第2 _66 本紙張尺度適中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X29—7公釐) 527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 層),單元1 926分別連接至下層而至第1列和第3列的 單元。開關陣列間垂直箱型區1 928的號碼表示配置序列 1920 (爲淸楚起見,只顯示該對之第一號碼)。檢查第2 層第0列顯示控制單元連續地以0,1,0和1位在單元之 上而至下層。序列(〇,1,〇,1)以最底之阿拉伯數字出現在第 2層控制單元之連續箱型區1 928,而建立第2層之底列位 置。 在第2層,單元之下一列沿第2列和第3列配置。在 第〇行之第2列和第3列之單元連接至其他連接對1和3。 至下層之最低列數爲〇,但爲避免佈局過程中的模糊不 淸,在水平箱型區1916 (在第1層和第2層之間)不重 複0。取而代之的是使用値1。亦即,在箱型區1916之每 個値表示連接至下層之該對單元之最低列數。因爲二個單 元使用四個列數,所以使用最低列,除非其已用於序列中。 在後者之實例中使用下個最低數目。因此,序列 0,1,4,5,8,9,13,14 用在第 1 層之上(而不是 0,0,4,4,8,8,13,3) 以有助於上面層之單元配置。以使用所描述規則塡滿在第 2層之上的箱型區1 9 1 6,且所說明之値用於佈局第3層之 單元。 配置序列(〇,4,2,6,1,5,3,7,0,...)614用於第3層以佈局 配置控制單元。第2層和第3層之間的垂直互連圖樣1932 符合序列6 1 4所需之連接。在第1 9 A圖中,6 1 4中每對之 第一阿拉柏數字以粗體字表示,因爲只使用該對之第一阿 拉柏數字來配置。單元1930連接於至下層之第〇列和第 67 本紙張尺度適州中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) (謂先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Please refer to Figure 19 in conjunction with Figures 1, 3, 6A, 6C, 18A, 18C, and 18D, which depict flat-latency switches 1900 for four rows and four layers. Each floor contains 16 columns of 1 902, numbered from 0 to 15. The flat-latency control unit 1800 connects two columns and two pairs of vertical connecting lines, as shown in Figs. 18A and 18C. A method of controlling the layout unit 1 800 in the array 120 will now be described, and other elements of the switch 100 are omitted in this description and illustration. The number of input ports 104 of the switch 1900 is the number of columns (16) times the number of rows (4) or 64. The number of output ports 154 is the same as the number of input ports. See Figures M8A and 18C. The flat-latency control unit 1800 has two outputs to the lower layers of the online S1 18 70 and S2 18 72. Because of the "dual output" characteristic of unit 1 800, the control unit of layer 0 is not used for the operation of the flat-latency switch. The flat-latency control unit 1 800 of ___________65 is arranged in the switch array 120. This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () (Read the words on the back first Note before filling out this page) The method involves first configuring the hive with the same configuration at the lowest level (the first level of all lines). Therefore, the control unit is arranged along a diagonal line extending from the lower left of the switch array 120 to the upper right. Each layer 1902 gives 16 columns and each cell 1800 gives 2 columns, so a switch array uses 16/2 or 8 cells. The control unit 1 880 having the priority 1 882 at the top of the pair is arranged along the diagonal of the control array 120 of the 0th row 1910. In the next row (line 1), the control units with priority in the bottom column are used to fill the control array. The method of changing the priority from one row to the next is used for the rest of the switch 1900 layout. The other control array for the 0th row of all layers above the 1st layer contains the same layout as the 1st layer, that is, the equivalent configuration of the top priority unit 1882. This completes the leftmost row and the bottommost layer of the switch 1 900 Layout. Starting from the second layer, the remaining switch arrays are arranged in each layer in a left-to-right sequence, and move up one layer at a time until the top layer is completed. The number in the box area 1916 indicates the lowest number of output ports connected to the control unit 1 800 to one of the lower pairs of port 154. The display unit 1910 is connected to port 0, and is also connected to port 1. The number "1" is omitted in Figure 19 because space is limited and no number is needed during layout. The number 1916 in the box area is used to help configure the upper control unit. Please also refer to Figure 9, on the second layer, the information moving to the right along column 0 follows the connection specified by the sequence (0,2,1,3,0, ...). The first unit 1924 is connected to columns 0 and 2 below. Units below 1 926 on the right are connected to columns 1 and 3. A vertical interconnection pattern between layers 1 and 2. Pattern 1922 forms a connection in accordance with sequence 910. Units 1924 are connected to the lower layer to the 0th and 2nd columns, respectively. In the next line (2_66 this paper is in accordance with Chinese National Standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210X29-7 mm) 527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () layer), unit 1 926 is connected to the lower layer to the first column and Cell in column 3. The number of the vertical box area 1 928 between the switch arrays indicates the configuration sequence 1920 (for the sake of clarity, only the first number of the pair is shown). Checking the 0th column of the 2nd level shows that the control unit is continuously above the unit with 0, 1, 0 and 1 digits to the lower level. The sequence (0, 1, 0, 1) appears as the lowest Arabic numeral in the continuous box-shaped area 1 928 of the control unit on the second floor, and establishes the bottom row position on the second floor. On the second level, the column below the unit is arranged along the second and third columns. The cells in columns 2 and 3 of row 0 are connected to other connection pairs 1 and 3. The lowest number of columns to the lower level is 0, but to avoid ambiguity in the layout process, the horizontal box area 1916 (between the first and second layers) does not repeat 0. Instead, use 値 1. That is, each frame in the box-shaped region 1916 indicates the lowest number of rows of the pair of cells connected to the lower layer. Because two cells use four column numbers, the lowest column is used unless it is already used in a sequence. In the latter example, the next lowest number is used. So the sequence 0,1,4,5,8,9,13,14 is used on layer 1 (instead of 0,0,4,4,8,8,13,3) to help the upper layer Of the unit configuration. The box-shaped area 1 9 1 6 above the second layer is filled using the described rules, and the illustrated ones are used to lay out the units of the third layer. A configuration sequence (〇, 4,2,6,1,5,3,7,0, ...) 614 is used for the third layer to configure the control unit in a layout. The vertical interconnect pattern 1932 between layers 2 and 3 matches the connections required for sequence 6 1 4. In Figure 19A, the first Arabic numerals of each pair in 6 1 4 are shown in bold type, because only the first Arabic numerals of this pair are used for configuration. Unit 1930 is connected to columns 0 and 67 of the lower paper size. Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 size (210X297 mm).
8 79 7 2 5 Λ A7 B7 "一 - —… - - 發明説明() 4歹[J。在第〇行,在對角線中之下個單元連接第1列和第 5列,:再下個單元連接第2列和第6列,且在對角線中之 第四個單元連接第3列和第7列。亦即,四對之第一個阿 拉柏數字形成序列Μ,2和3。 自序列(0,4,2,6,1,5,3,7,0, ...)6 14而來之替代阿拉柏數 字產生序列(〇,2,1,3,0,...)以用於列的佈局。沿第0列和第 1列,單元18 00配置於至下層之連接0,1,2和3。此序 列以第3層之一系列垂直箱型區1 928之底下的阿拉柏數 字顯示。沿第2列和第3列,單元配置於連接1,3,0和 2之上。第3層之控制單元以行至第0行右邊方式配置於 垂直箱型區1928中相似數字之交叉點而至左邊和下面層 間的箱型區1916。以使用第2層所述之規則塡滿在第3 層之上的層間箱型區1 928。 配置序列(〇,8,4,12,1,9,5,13,2,10,6,14,3,1 1,7,15,...)658 用於佈局第4層1 950。單元1 940連接於至第0列和第8 列之下層,持續該對角線,¥個單元連接至第1列和第9 列,然後下個單元連接至第2列和第1 0列,以此類推。 該互連圖樣1942符合此連接需要。第4層之其餘部份以 使用源自65 8之每對之第一個阿拉柏數字之序列,也就是 0,4,1,5,2,6,3,7,0,〜,先塡滿垂直箱型區來佈局。此序列 用於塡滿第4層之垂直箱型區1944。該控制單元配置於 自箱型區至左和每個開關陣列下面之相似數字之交叉點。 第19A圖說明此文中用於佈局平坦潛候期開關1 900之控 制單元1 800之所述規則的應用。 (掮先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)8 79 7 2 5 Λ A7 B7 " 一-...--Description of the invention () 4 歹 [J. In the 0th row, the next unit in the diagonal line connects the 1st and 5th columns: the next unit connects the 2nd and 6th columns, and the fourth unit in the diagonal line connects the 3 and 7 columns. That is, the first Arab numeral of four pairs forms the sequences M, 2 and 3. From the sequence (0,4,2,6,1,5,3,7,0, ...) 6 14 instead of the Arabi number generation sequence (0,2,1,3,0, ... ) For the layout of the columns. Along the 0th and 1st columns, the unit 18 00 is arranged at the connections 0, 1, 2 and 3 to the lower layer. This sequence is shown in Arabic numerals under 1 928 in a series of vertical box sections on the third floor. Along the second and third columns, the cells are arranged above the connections 1, 3, 0 and 2. The control unit on the 3rd floor is arranged from the right to the 0th line to the intersection of similar numbers in the vertical box-shaped area 1928 to the box-shaped area 1916 between the left and the lower layers. The inter-layer box area 1 928 above the third layer is filled using the rules described in the second layer. The configuration sequence (〇, 8,4,12,1,9,5,13,2,10,6,14,3,1 1,7,15, ...) 658 is used to lay out layer 4 1950. Unit 1 940 is connected to columns 0 and 8 below, continuing the diagonal, ¥ units are connected to columns 1 and 9, and then the next unit is connected to columns 2 and 10, And so on. The interconnection pattern 1942 meets this connection requirement. The rest of the fourth layer uses the sequence of the first Arab numerals from each pair of 65 8 which is 0,4,1,5,2,6,3,7,0, ~, first Full vertical box area to layout. This sequence is used to fill the vertical box area 1944 on the fourth floor. The control unit is located at the intersection of similar numbers from the box area to the left and below each switch array. FIG. 19A illustrates the application of the rules described herein for the control unit 1 800 for laying out the flat latency switch 1 900. (掮 Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)
6868
527798 A7 B7 i、發明説明() 經治部中央標攻局兵二消負合作私印 若由線W2進入單元1910之訊息未被具有優先權之線 W1上的另一訊息所阻擋而且也優先移至第〇層之相同 列,以及若目標列未爲下層所阻擋那麼在第0列之訊息立 刻被向下傳送至訊息目標。因此,線W2或線W2上未被 阻擋之訊息總是向下移動。在平坦潛候期開關1 900說明 之實行及使用,進入控制單元1 800之訊息被阻擋之可能 性非常小,因此每次訊息自左進入控制單元後一般是向下 移動。也請參閱第17圖,開關1700之潛候期就是在訊息 向下移動之前訊息移至下一行之機率爲50%。因此,向下 落之訊息有一半的時間一般是到達”錯誤”列組。相較之 下,對開關1900來說,向下落之訊息總是有利於連接至 上和下列組。在既定之相似載荷情況中,開關1 700之平 均潛候期較開關1 900多50%。再者,流通時間使單一訊 息通過開關1 900之潛候期差異由最小値之1〇〇%至200%, 因而通過開關1 900之單一訊息的潛候期對所有訊息而言 幾乎爲固定的,且與單一路徑開關1 700之最小潛候期相 同。 輸入埠連榕 請參閱第8B圖,在下層移向右之一訊息b 840可以 阻擋842在上層之另一訊息A 802向下移動,結果訊息a 被阻擋,其他訊息C 844和D 846同樣爲訊息a所阻擋。 假設在第一種情況避免訊息A被阻檔,那麼訊息c和D 也不會被阻擋。當開關中訊息數目增加,個別訊息被阻擋 的可能性則增加。也請參閱第4圖,允許訊息200進入開 69 本紙張尺度这用中國國家標率((、NS ) Λ4規格(210X 297公釐) (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 527798 A7 B7五、發明説明() 經漳部中决標卑局貝-T消费合作社印製 關100,不管何時行準備訊號404到達高狀態且輸出埠也 未被阻擋4 0 6。開關1 0 0之統計分析顯不在通過開關之任 何實施例期間,降低訊息輸入至開關之速率可顯著減少訊 息被阻擋之可能性。 輸入至開關之最大速率(100%)定義在當所有埠1〇4在 每次未阻擋的時間406接收一訊息的情況。若端視開關1〇〇 之尺寸和特別實施例而將速率降低25%至50%之範圍,則 在潛候期分散之訊息阻擋及負面影響則可大大地降低,甚 至於微不足道。將低輸入速率的方法之一爲指定連接於埠 104計量器或其他外部裝置來減少注入訊號之頻率,不利 的是,此技術承擔開關外部之裝置速率減少的責任。另一 替代方法包括減少行準備訊號之傳送速率,不利的是,外 部裝置必須等候較長的時間以注入訊號。不管是哪一種減 少速率方式,其影響爲增加有效潛候期及減少開關1 〇〇之 總輸貫量。 請參閱第17圖和第20A圖,其顯示八乘四開關1700 之頂層1702具有32個輸入埠104。在開關1700之另一 實施例中,相同頂層2010具有少於一半之輸入線。在頂 層之控制單元300可連接至一輸入埠或不連接2112。第 20A圖之前兩行說明在無增加潛候期之不預期效果情況下 可減少速率至50%之方法。可以不連接特定單元2114至 輸出104來更進一步減少和調整該輸入速率。在開關1700 之一實施例中,同樣以對應於省略之輸入埠(圖未示)之 模式省略輸出連接1 54。因此,開關具有相同數目之輸入 (部先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ---------70 — 本紙張尺度这川中國國家標率((、NS ) Λ4規格(21〇X 297公釐) 527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 經潢部屮决標準局貝Jr.消贽告作社印製 埠和輸出璋。在另一實施例中,可操作32個輸入埠。因 此,開關1 700之另一實施例可具有32個輸入埠和32個 輸出埠,或16個輸入埠和16個輸入埠,或是16個輸入 埠和32個輸出埠。在其他實施例可選擇其他連接數目, 端視載荷因子及效能的考量。輸入1 04之數目和排列與整 個可能數相較決定開關內之最大訊息流通密度。訊息流通 密度定義爲開關內訊息之實際數目而不是最大可能數目。 請參閱第18D,19和20B圖,以使用第20A圖之前二 行所描述之相同方式可減少平坦潛候期開關的輸入速率至 50%。亦即,在另外行之單元1 880沒有輸入連接2024。 在第20C圖中,另一方法包括只連接單元1880之兩個向 上輸入線1 874和1 876的其中一條至輸入埠104。輸入104 較佳是連接至無優先權2072和2074之列,因爲在相同列, 至左之單元給予該列優先權,因此該列較無可能包含阻擋 輸入1 04之訊息。爲進一步減少和微調開關輸入速率,使 用第20B和20C圖所示之方法組合,尤其,一些行之每 個單元2072只有一個輸入,且其他行則無2024,相似於 第20A圖之輸出連接。 開關100之一實施例之矽積體電路晶片實施之輸入(及 輸出)埠數受到接腳的限制。亦即,晶片中可獲得之輸入 和輸出連接數決定開關的大小。此情況起因於用於實施控 制單元之比較少量的邏輯閘。給定此組技術決定之情況及 使用獨特少量之閘極,使用多於接腳容量之邏輯容量以減 少潛候期和訊息流通密度。利用邏輯容量之一種方法是在 (¾先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ^紙張尺度述用中國國家標f ( (、NS ) Λ4規格(210X297公釐) 79 27 5 經濟部中央標準局员工消f合作社印製 A7 ___^五、發明説明() 較複雜之平坦潛候期單元1 800花費額外可獲得之邏輯。 另一種方法爲減少輸入和輸出埠連接2112和結合更多行 以構成差異。可組合此兩種方法,如第20B和20C圖所 舉例。實際上,可取得之I/O連接或接腳決定開關的容量 此說明之實施使用2至4的乘方或更多倍之最少所需行 數。例如,以使用第20C圖之輸入連接方法或第20B和20C 圖之結合方法,64-埠開關1 900以8至12內部行(與第 1 9圖之四行相較)來實施。 右至左連接 在第21A,21B和21C圖中,說明不同東至西(或左 至右)的連接實施。請參閱第21A圖並配合第1和3圖, 最右行164之訊息通過選擇的FIFO緩衝器114且到達一 列出口點172。該出口點172爲沿一列360自左至右移動 之訊息之最右位置。在點172之訊息無法成功向下移動至 下面的層或輸出埠。在開關1 〇〇之一些實施例中,訊息在 路徑2104中向左傳輸至在相同列之列出口點174且連接 至在第〇行1 60之開關陣列1 20之控制單元。在第0行之 訊息立刻有機會向下移動而持續朝向訊息目標列。 請參閱第7,20A和21B圖,開關之另一實施例具有訊 息到達列出口點1 72,其轉送2 1 06至一不與外部連接之 輸入埠104。FIFO 2108調整該訊息之時序以符合行時序 需要。未使用之列入口點2120可與外部連接且作爲一輸 入埠1 04,但是在由頂層下面之一層的點1 74進入開關之 訊息不必到達底層之所有可能列的限制下,例如,由第2 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 72 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4规梠(210X 297公势) 527798 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局負工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明() 層之上列組之列進入開關之訊息不能到達在第1層之底部 列組7 1 6之任何列。由頂層下面之層進入開關之訊息比進 入頂層之訊息更有利於獲得較低之潛候期,但是限制在訊 息可到達之可能目標的範圍內。 在再另一實施例(圖未示)中,其爲第21A與21B圖 所示之連接的組合,一些出口點172連接2104至入口點 174,而其他出口點連接2106至未使用之輸入埠104。請 參閱第21C圖,開關100之另一實施例包括一出口點172, 其連接於不同列2110之入口點174,其有利於持續被阻 擋於一列中之訊息有其他的機會向下移至其他列中。 請參閱第2A,2B和2C圖,訊息200 —般包括一標頭 部份和一有效載荷206,具有一總長度214。進入開關1〇〇 之任何實施例之個別訊息的長度不同。該開關可接受任何 訊息長度達到一預特定之最大尺寸。對一給定之開關100 實施例而言,根據開關之實施,標頭之格式和大小爲固定, 但有效載荷之長度可以不同,因而造成總訊息長度214不 同。根據第8B圖和第2 1 A圖的討論,自任何行之上層進 入控制單元之訊息可被重複阻擋,使得訊息循環回至在相 同列2104之入口點174。在訊息持續被阻擋之情況下, 訊息到達該行的控制單元,那兒爲訊息自上層先進入列的 地方。亦即,訊息在”標頭”或通訊位元202追趕”尾端”或 有效載荷206之最後位元的情況中。因此,一列之儲存容 量爲足夠容納訊息之所有位元2 1 4。 請參閱第11A,13A,15A,16B,17和18C圖以及檢 73 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(€呢)/\4坭枱(210乂 297公耪) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 、一u 口 527798 經濟部中央標準局t貝工消費合作社印製 A7 ____ B7 五、發明説明() 查控制單元1300,1500,1620和18〇〇,在通過單元之左 至右路徑中,一控制單元包含一或多個延遲元件1102。 這些延遲元件參與單元之位址解碼和訊息發送。沿一列自 第一行至最後一行聚集所有延遲元件1 1 02於所有控制單 元,延遲元件的聚集也可作爲一個FIFO儲存裝置。例如, 控制單元1 300包含兩個延遲元件。開關1700具有四行, 因此一列之四個控制單元的儲存容量爲2乘4,或8個位 元。實際上,訊息長度214遠大於8,因此FIF01 14可用 於擴充列儲存容量至訊息大小2 1 4。持續以訊息長度爲32 個位元爲例,每個FIFO 1 14之長度爲(32-8 )或24個位 元。 請參_第20A,20B和20C圖,相對於輸入104之總 數,增加行數有助於減少開關內訊息的粗擋以及改善潛候 期。增加行數的另一好處爲一列之儲存容量可相對增加。 例如,在具有1 6行之開關另一實例中之32位元訊息完全 不用FIFO 114。16行可產生32位元延遲的聚集,其表示 一 32位元訊息可在一列中循環,標頭和尾端不會相衝撞。 與I/O連接相較,過多邏輯閘利用技術的情況,除了如前 面所討論有助於減少資料流通密度之外,邏輯閘可用於許 多控制單元,此乃因增加每列之訊息儲存容量。在開關100 之圖式說明實施例中,該邏輯閘可用於盡可能產生許多路 徑,亦即,產生不連接於輸入1 04之額外的行。在與可獲 得閘極有關係之訊息長度214爲大之一實施例中,FIFO 1 1 4用於每一列中。 74 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規枱(210X 297公势) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 、-0 527798 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局負工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明() 低潛候期輸出 第2 2 A圖顯示一低潛候期輸出結構,其可減少底層之 阻擋。請參閱第2A圖,一訊息200包含一列標頭位址204 ’ 其指定開關底層之目標列。具有第22A圖之輸出結構之 開關1〇〇實施例確實使用行標頭212。標頭204所指定之 目標列爲訊息之最後目的地,且當訊息到達底層時,訊息 所在之實體行爲無形。到達任何底層列之訊息自所有行中 平行收集且供應給最終輸出裝置176。事實上,複數個行 用於增加頻寬和減少到目標2206之潛候期,以及減少較 高層之阻擋。因爲到達底層之訊息立刻向下移動,因此該 訊息從未在第〇層向右移動以試圖阻擋在上層之訊息。所 描述之輸出方法有助於以最快可能速率汲取開關1 〇〇之訊 息,因而減少在上層之潛候期和壅塞。 請參閱第1和2A圖,在開關100之實施例中,輸出 結構180包括複數個外部裝置或訊息目標2206。這些裝 置的數目與底層之列數相同。在緩衝器陣列1 52中之一緩 衝器2210 —連串接收來自開關底層之控制單元2202之訊 息200。此實施例可用於低潛候期應用,因爲該緩衝器2210 總是準備接收資料,使得單元2202沒有一佔用訊號輸出。 該單元2202總是立刻向下傳送該訊息。 請參閱第4,12B和22B圖,訊息之通訊位元202在 行準備訊號422所表示之時間到達緩衝器22 1 0。訊息間 之最少時間量爲訊息間時間tm1242。緩衝器2210 —連串 地接收訊息通訊位元202和有效載荷206。如第10 .圖描 75 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Λ4規掊(210X 297公§ ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 527798 A7 ____ B7五、發明説明() 經滴部中央標準局賀工消费合作社印$ 述所討論,該標頭204自該訊息中移除。緩衝器2210之 內容物爲平行之匯流排178所移除且遞送至目標176,例 如超級電腦之處理器或控制單元。於是該緩衝器2210重 新設定爲零以表示無訊息存在。在緩衝器2210中有訊息 的存在以緩衝器中的通訊位元202來表示。該通訊位元表 示有效載荷在緩衝器中且在下一個週期422之前將被移 除。 請參閱第1,12B,22A和22B圖,在結構2206中之 緩衝器2210之輸出時序對每個FIFO 1102來說爲不同, 因爲這些緩衝器連接至在不同行之控制單元2202。時間 差異衍生自控制單元中之延遲元件且等於時間t。1240。 該行時序訊號可由時序埠1 68的外部可獲得。 列及行位址 請參閱第1,2B和15B圖,具有一行位址標頭之訊息 200朝向在特定列和行之輸出埠。在開關100之實施例中, 若該位址符合控制單元之行位置,第〇層之控制單元1550 讀取行位址2 1 2且向下傳送訊息。在具有許多行之互連結 構中,訊息在到達目的行之前有機會向有移動通過許多單 元1 550,而避免優先落至第〇層之列之第1層訊息作此 動作。因此,使用第〇層控制單元1 550之開關100實施 例無法總是有效地汲取來自開關之訊息’因而增加訊息爲 上層阻擋之可能性。 < 請參閱第1,23A,23B和23C圖,在第0層之輸出結 構180立刻轉送未被阻擋和具有列及行位址2308之訊息 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) _____76 >、紙張尺度適ifl中國國家標(、NS ) Λ4規格(210X297公釐) 527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 經漪部中央標準局员工消费合作社印製 200至輸出埠176。在第0層之訊息A被定位址於第〇列 第2行。訊息A進入讀取23 14行位址212及在路徑2312 向下傳送訊息至輸出控制23 22之控制單元2310,其中該 訊息在路徑2326向右移動至連接於目標輸出埠176之 FIFO緩衝器1112。在單元2316上面之第1層單元且優 先落至下一行之單元23 16之另一訊息200如預期地未被 自第0層之單元23 10向右傳送之訊息所阻擋。自單元23 16 在路徑23 30中向右移動之訊息以向上傳送佔用訊號2316 至第〇層之控制單元23 10來阻擋單元2316向下傳送訊息 至相同位址23 08。在單元23 16中定址於相同列及不同行 之另一訊息不會被路徑23 30上之單元所阻擋。因此,在 使用單元23 10和23 22之開關100實施例中,同時發生之 訊息朝向相同列不同行不會導致阻擋,該阻擋是發生在使 用第〇層之控制單元1 550之實施例中。 冬元播送控制 大型開關所欲之特色爲多元播送傳輸能力,即傳送單 一訊息至許多或所有輸出埠。在另一實施例中,單一開關 1 0 0同時支援一對所有訊息發送以及一對一訊息發送。此 實施例之方法爲每當該訊息落至底下一層時即複製一多元 播送訊息。所預期之結果爲當訊息最後到達第0層時產生 一副本給開關之每列。於是該多元播送訊息沿第0層之每 列向右移動,且一副本向下落至每行’結桌所有輸出埠1 54 接收該訊息之副本。 第24A圖顯示用於多元播送訊息230之控制單元 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)527798 A7 B7 i. Description of the invention () The private seal of the Central Standard Offensive Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the second cooperation of the private seal, if the message entered by line W2 into unit 1910 is not blocked by another message on line W1 with priority and has priority Move to the same row at level 0, and if the target row is not blocked by the lower level, the message at row 0 is immediately sent down to the message target. Therefore, the unblocked message on line W2 or line W2 always moves downward. During the implementation and use of the flat latency switch 1 900, it is very unlikely that the information entering the control unit 1 800 will be blocked. Therefore, each time the message enters the control unit from the left, it generally moves downward. Please also refer to Figure 17, the latency of switch 1700 is 50% chance of the message moving to the next line before the message moves down. Therefore, half of the time that a falling message arrives is usually in the "wrong" column group. In contrast, for the switch 1900, the falling message is always good for connecting to the upper and lower groups. Under the given similar load conditions, the average latency of switch 1 700 is more than 50% higher than switch 1 900. In addition, the circulation time allows the difference in latency between a single message to pass through the switch 1 900 from 100% to 200%, so the latency of a single message through the switch 1 900 is almost constant for all messages. , And the same as the minimum latency of the single path switch 1 700. Please refer to Figure 8B for the input port. In the lower layer, one message b 840 can block the other message A 802 in the upper layer 842. As a result, message a is blocked. The other messages C 844 and D 846 are the same. Message a is blocked. Assuming that message A is blocked in the first case, messages c and D will not be blocked either. As the number of messages in the switch increases, the likelihood of individual messages being blocked increases. Please also refer to Figure 4, allowing the message 200 to enter 69 pages. This paper size is based on the Chinese national standard ((, NS) Λ4 specification (210X 297 mm) (read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () After the Ministry of Zhang ’s final bid, the Beibei-T Consumer Cooperative Co., Ltd. printed 100, no matter when the line ready signal 404 reached a high state and the output port was not blocked 4 0. Switch 1 0 0 of Statistical analysis is not apparent during any of the embodiments that pass through the switch. Decreasing the rate at which messages are input to the switch can significantly reduce the likelihood of messages being blocked. The maximum rate (100%) input to the switch is defined when all ports 104 A situation where a message is received at an unblocked time 406. If the size and special embodiment of the switch 1000 are reduced depending on the size of the switch, the blocking and negative effects of the message dispersed during the latency period can be reduced. Greatly reduced, even insignificant. One of the methods of low input rate is to specify the port 104 meter or other external device to reduce the frequency of the injected signal. Unfortunately, this technology assumes the external equipment of the switch. Responsibility for reducing the rate. Another alternative method is to reduce the transmission rate of the line preparation signal. Unfortunately, the external device must wait a long time to inject the signal. No matter which way to reduce the rate, the effect is to increase the effective latency. And reduce the total output of the switch 1000. Please refer to FIGS. 17 and 20A, which show that the top layer 1702 of the eight by four switch 1700 has 32 input ports 104. In another embodiment of the switch 1700, The same top layer 2010 has less than half of the input lines. The control unit 300 on the top layer can be connected to an input port or not connected to 2112. The first two lines of Figure 20A show that the rate can be reduced without the unexpected effect of increasing latency. To 50% method. The specific input unit 2114 to output 104 may not be connected to further reduce and adjust the input rate. In one embodiment of the switch 1700, the mode corresponding to the omitted input port (not shown) is also omitted. The output is connected to 1 54. Therefore, the switches have the same number of inputs (the first read the precautions on the back before filling this page) --------- 70 — this paper size House standard rate ((, NS) Λ4 specification (21 × X 297 mm) 527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () Ministry of Economic Affairs and the Ministry of Economic Affairs decided the standard bureau Jr. Consumer Reports Agency printed port and output card. In another embodiment, 32 input ports can be operated. Therefore, another embodiment of the switch 1 700 can have 32 input ports and 32 output ports, or 16 input ports and 16 input ports, or 16 Input ports and 32 output ports. In other embodiments, other connection numbers can be selected, depending on load factor and performance considerations. The number and arrangement of the input 104 and the total possible number determine the maximum message flow density in the switch. Message flow density is defined as the actual number of messages in the switch, not the maximum possible number. Refer to Figures 18D, 19, and 20B to reduce the input rate of the flat latency switch to 50% in the same manner as described in the previous two rows of Figure 20A. That is, there is no input connection 2024 in unit 1 880 in another row. In FIG. 20C, another method includes connecting only one of the two upward input lines 1874 and 1 876 of the unit 1880 to the input port 104. Input 104 is preferably connected to the columns without priority 2072 and 2074, because in the same column, the cell to the left gives priority to the column, so the column is less likely to contain messages that block input 04. To further reduce and fine-tune the switching input rate, use the method combination shown in Figures 20B and 20C. In particular, some rows have only one input per cell 2072, and other rows have no 2024, similar to the output connections in Figure 20A. The number of input (and output) ports implemented by the silicon integrated circuit chip of one embodiment of the switch 100 is limited by the pins. That is, the number of input and output connections available in the chip determines the size of the switch. This situation arises from the relatively small number of logic gates used to implement the control unit. Given this set of technical decisions and the use of a unique number of gates, use more logic capacity than pin capacity to reduce latency and message flow density. One way to use logical capacity is to read the notes on the back and then fill out this page. ^ The paper size is described in Chinese national standard f ((, NS) Λ4 specification (210X297 mm) 79 27 5 Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 printed by the employee's cooperative. ___ ^ V. Description of the invention () The more complicated flat latency unit 1 800 costs extra logic available. Another method is to reduce the input and output port connections 2112 and combine more rows to form Difference. The two methods can be combined, as shown in Figures 20B and 20C. Actually, the available I / O connections or pins determine the capacity of the switch. The implementation of this description uses a power of 2 to 4 or more The minimum required number of lines. For example, using the input connection method of Figure 20C or the combination of Figures 20B and 20C, the 64-port switch 1 900 has 8 to 12 internal rows (compared to the four rows of Figure 19). Compare) to right. The right to left connection is shown in Figures 21A, 21B, and 21C, which illustrates the implementation of different east to west (or left to right) connections. Please refer to Figure 21A and cooperate with Figures 1 and 3, rightmost row Message 164 passes through the selected FIFO buffer 114 and reaches a list Point 172. The exit point 172 is the rightmost position of the message moving from left to right along a row of 360. The message at point 172 cannot be successfully moved down to the lower layer or output port. In some embodiments of the switch 1000 In the path 2104, the message is transmitted left to the exit point 174 in the same column and connected to the control unit 12 of the switch array 1 20 in the 0th row. The message in the 0th row immediately has the opportunity to move down and Continue towards the message target row. Refer to Figures 7, 20A and 21B. Another embodiment of the switch has a message reaches the row exit point 1 72, which forwards 2 1 06 to an input port 104 that is not externally connected. FIFO 2108 adjustment The timing of this message is in line with the timing requirements of the row. The unused entry point 2120 can be connected to the outside and used as an input port 104, but the message entering the switch from point 1 74 below the top layer does not have to reach all the possibilities of the bottom layer. For example, from the 2nd (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 72 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 Regulations (210X 297 public power) 527798 A7 B7 Central Standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative Cooperative V. Description of the Invention () The messages entering the switches in the upper group of the upper layer cannot reach any of the columns 7 1 6 in the lower group of the first layer. Information entering the top layer is more conducive to obtaining a lower latency, but is limited to the range of possible targets that the message can reach. In yet another embodiment (not shown), it is shown in Figures 21A and 21B. For a combination of these connections, some exit points 172 connect 2104 to entry point 174, while other exit points connect 2106 to unused input port 104. Please refer to FIG. 21C. Another embodiment of the switch 100 includes an exit point 172, which is connected to the entry point 174 of a different column 2110, which is conducive to the messages that are continuously blocked in one column. Column. Referring to Figures 2A, 2B, and 2C, message 200 generally includes a header portion and a payload 206 with a total length 214. The length of the individual messages entering any of the embodiments of the switch 100 is different. The switch can accept any message length up to a pre-specified maximum size. For a given embodiment of the switch 100, the format and size of the header are fixed according to the implementation of the switch, but the length of the payload can be different, thus causing the total message length 214 to be different. According to the discussion in Figures 8B and 21A, the information entering the control unit from the upper layer of any row can be repeatedly blocked, so that the message loops back to the entry point 174 in the same column 2104. When the message is continuously blocked, the message reaches the control unit of the row, where the message enters the column first from the upper layer. That is, the message is in the case where the "header" or the communication bit 202 catches up with the "tail" or the last bit of the payload 206. Therefore, the storage capacity of a row is enough to accommodate all the bits 2 1 4 of the message. Please refer to the drawings of 11A, 13A, 15A, 16B, 17 and 18C and check 73. This paper size is applicable to Chinese national standard (€?) / \ 4 坭 台 (210 乂 297 乂) Please read the precautions on the back before (Fill in this page), 口 口 527798 Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Tung Kee Consumer Cooperative, A7 ____ B7 V. Description of the invention () Check the control units 1300, 1500, 1620, and 1800, from left to right of the passing unit In the path, a control unit includes one or more delay elements 1102. These delay elements participate in the address decoding and message transmission of the unit. All the delay elements 1 1 02 are gathered in all the control units along a column from the first row to the last row. The aggregation of the delay elements can also be used as a FIFO storage device. For example, the control unit 1 300 includes two delay elements. The switch 1700 has four rows, so the storage capacity of four control units in one column is 2 by 4, or 8 bits. In fact, the message length 214 is much larger than 8, so FIF01 14 can be used to expand the storage capacity of the row to the message size 2 1 4. Take the message length of 32 bits as an example, and the length of each FIFO 114 is (32-8) or 24 bits. Please refer to Figures 20A, 20B, and 20C. Compared to the total number of inputs 104, increasing the number of lines helps to reduce the coarse block of messages in the switch and improve the latency. Another benefit of increasing the number of rows is that the storage capacity of a column can be relatively increased. For example, in another example with 16 rows of switches, 32-bit messages do not use FIFO 114 at all. 16 rows can generate a 32-bit delayed aggregation, which means that a 32-bit message can be cycled in a column, with the header and The tails do not collide. Compared to I / O connections, the use of too many logic gates in technology, in addition to helping reduce the data flow density as discussed earlier, logic gates can be used in many control units because of the increased message storage capacity per row. In the illustrative embodiment of the switch 100, the logic gate can be used to generate as many paths as possible, i.e., to generate additional rows not connected to the input 104. In one embodiment where the message length 214 associated with the available gates is large, FIFO 1 1 4 is used in each column. 74 This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 gauge (210X 297 public power) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page),-0 527798 A7 B7 Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives V. Description of the invention () Low-latency output Figure 2 A shows a low-latency output structure, which can reduce the barrier of the bottom layer. Referring to FIG. 2A, a message 200 includes a header address 204 'which specifies a target column at the bottom of the switch. The switch 100 embodiment having the output structure of Fig. 22A does use the row header 212. The target specified by the header 204 is listed as the final destination of the message, and when the message reaches the bottom layer, the physical behavior of the message is invisible. Messages that reach any of the bottom columns are collected in parallel from all rows and supplied to the final output device 176. In fact, multiple rows are used to increase bandwidth and reduce latency to target 2206, as well as reduce barriers to higher levels. Because the message that reaches the bottom moves immediately down, the message never moves to the right at level 0 in an attempt to block the message at the upper level. The described output method helps to obtain the information of the switch 1000 at the fastest possible rate, thus reducing the latency and congestion in the upper layers. Referring to FIGS. 1 and 2A, in the embodiment of the switch 100, the output structure 180 includes a plurality of external devices or message targets 2206. The number of these devices is the same as that of the bottom row. One of the buffers 2210 in the buffer array 152-serially receives the message 200 from the control unit 2202 of the bottom layer of the switch. This embodiment can be used for low-latency applications, because the buffer 2210 is always ready to receive data, so that the unit 2202 does not have an occupied signal output. The unit 2202 always sends the message immediately downwards. Referring to Figures 4, 12B and 22B, the communication bit 202 of the message reaches the buffer 22 1 0 at the time indicated by the line preparation signal 422. The minimum amount of time between messages is the time between messages tm1242. Buffer 2210-Receives serial communication bits 202 and payload 206 in series. As shown in Figure 10. Figure 75 of this paper is applicable to Chinese National Standards (CNS) Λ4 Regulations (210X 297 public §) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 527798 A7 ____ B7 V. Description of the invention () The Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Industry, Hegong Cooperative Co., Ltd. printed the discussion, and the header 204 was removed from the message. The contents of the buffer 2210 are removed by a parallel bus 178 and delivered to a target 176, such as a processor or control unit of a supercomputer. The buffer 2210 is then reset to zero to indicate that no message exists. The presence of a message in the buffer 2210 is indicated by the communication bit 202 in the buffer. This communication bit indicates that the payload is in the buffer and will be removed before the next cycle 422. Referring to Figures 1, 12B, 22A, and 22B, the output timing of the buffer 2210 in the structure 2206 is different for each FIFO 1102 because these buffers are connected to the control units 2202 in different rows. The time difference is derived from the delay element in the control unit and is equal to time t. 1240. The timing signal of this line is available externally from timing port 1 68. Column and Row Addresses Refer to Figures 1, 2B, and 15B. Messages with a row address header 200 are directed to output ports in specific rows and rows. In the embodiment of the switch 100, if the address matches the row position of the control unit, the control unit 1550 of the 0th layer reads the row address 2 1 2 and transmits the message downward. In an interconnected structure with many rows, the message has the opportunity to move through a number of cells 1 550 before reaching the destination row, and to avoid doing so by layer 1 messages that fall preferentially to layer 0. Therefore, the embodiment of the switch 100 using the 0th-level control unit 1 550 cannot always effectively extract the message from the switch ', thereby increasing the possibility that the message is blocked by the upper layer. < Please refer to Figures 1, 23A, 23B, and 23C. The output structure 180 at layer 0 immediately forwards the unblocked and column and row addresses 2308 (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) _____76 > The paper size is suitable ifl Chinese National Standard (, NS) Λ4 specification (210X297 mm) 527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () Printed from 200 to output port 176 by the Consumers Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Yi. Message A at level 0 is located at column 0 and line 2. Message A enters read 23 14 line address 212 and sends the message down on path 2312 to the control unit 2310 of output control 23 22, where the message moves to the right on path 2326 to the FIFO buffer 1112 connected to the target output port 176 . The other message 200 of the layer 1 unit above the unit 2316 and which fell first to the unit 23 16 of the next row is not blocked by the message transmitted to the right from the unit 23 10 of the layer 0 as expected. The message that the unit 23 16 moves to the right in the path 23 30 transmits the occupation signal 2316 to the control unit 23 10 of the 0th layer upward to block the unit 2316 from transmitting the message downward to the same address 23 08. Another message addressed in the same row and in a different row in cell 23 16 will not be blocked by the cell on path 23 30. Therefore, in the embodiment of the switch 100 using the units 23 10 and 23 22, simultaneous occurrence of messages directed to the same column but different rows does not cause blocking, which occurs in the embodiment using the control unit 1 550 of the 0th layer. Dongyuan Broadcasting Control The desired feature of the large switch is the multi-casting transmission capability, that is, sending a single message to many or all output ports. In another embodiment, the single switch 100 supports one-to-all message sending and one-to-one message sending simultaneously. The method of this embodiment is to copy a multiplex broadcast message whenever the message falls to the bottom layer. The expected result is to produce a copy for each column of the switch when the message finally reaches layer 0. The multi-cast message then moves to the right along each column of the 0th level, and a copy is received down to all output ports 1 54 of each row 'to receive a copy of the message. Figure 24A shows the control unit for multicast message 230 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)
、1T 本紙張尺度適/fl中國國家標净((、NS ) Λ4規格(210X 297公楚) 527798 經濟部中史標率局货,t消费合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 2400,且第24B,24C和24D圖顯示多元播送控制單元2400 之不同狀態。在此所描述及第24A,24B,24C和24D圖 所顯示之多元播送能力與所有其他實施例一致,使得以額 外控制單元邏輯之成本可選擇性地建立多元播送於任何實 施例中。請參閱第24A圖並配合第2, 10, 12A,12B,13A 和13B圖,多元播送訊息230在標頭上包含第二位元, 其稱爲接續通訊位元202之多元播送位元220。 當多元播送位元設定爲ZERO時,該訊息被傳送至由 列標頭204和行標頭2 1 2所決定之單一璋。用於控制點對 點傳輸之技術與第12, 13, 14和15圖所描述的技術相同。 另一延遲元件包括於控制單元2400之中以維持該多元播 送位元220。當通訊位元202爲ONE且該多元播送位元 爲ZERO以表示點對點傳輸時,控制單元2400檢查最高 有效位元208和佔用訊號BS 2406以決定訊息是否向下或 向右發送。當訊息230向下發送時,該通訊位元(ONE) 和多元播送位元(ZERO)連續往下傳送至線S 2412。在 完成兩個週期之後,連接延遲元件D1和線S,有利於得 到的結果是接續最高有效位元20 8之位元1004變成下一 層之最高有效位元。該訊息提前2個位元以維持層間時序 需要,如第12A和12B圖所示。 當多元播送位元220爲ONE,訊息230被向右發送直 至下層之上列和下列已接收該訊息之副本。當訊息230向 右移動,該訊息優先落至底下層之上列1 0 1 5和下列1 〇 1 6。 請參閱第24B圖,”上”位元224和”下”位元226起始是設 78 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標嘩((、NS ) Λ4規格(210X297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)、 1T This paper is suitable in size / fl China National Standard Net ((, NS) Λ4 specification (210X 297 Gongchu) 527798 Ministry of Economic Affairs, China Standards Bureau, A7 B7 printed by Consumer Cooperatives V. Description of invention () 2400, And Figures 24B, 24C, and 24D show different states of the multiplex control unit 2400. The multiplex broadcasting capabilities described here and shown in Figures 24A, 24B, 24C, and 24D are consistent with all other embodiments, allowing additional control units to be used The cost of logic can optionally be multiplexed in any embodiment. See Figure 24A and in conjunction with Figures 2, 10, 12A, 12B, 13A and 13B, the multiplexed message 230 includes a second bit in the header, It is called the multiplex broadcast bit 220 of the continuation communication bit 202. When the multiplex broadcast bit is set to ZERO, the message is transmitted to a single frame determined by the column header 204 and the row header 2 12. It is used for The technology for controlling the peer-to-peer transmission is the same as that described in Figures 12, 13, 14 and 15. Another delay element is included in the control unit 2400 to maintain the multicast bit 220. When the communication bit 202 is ONE and the The multiplex broadcast bit is ZERO. For point-to-point transmission, the control unit 2400 checks the most significant bit 208 and the occupation signal BS 2406 to determine whether the message is sent down or to the right. When the message 230 is sent down, the communication bit (ONE) and the multicast bit ( ZERO) is continuously transmitted down to line S 2412. After completing two cycles, connecting the delay element D1 and line S, it is beneficial to obtain the result that the bit 1004 that continues the most significant bit 20 8 becomes the most significant bit of the next layer The message is advanced 2 bits in advance to maintain the inter-layer timing requirements, as shown in Figures 12A and 12B. When the multiplex broadcast bit 220 is ONE, the message 230 is sent to the right until the upper layer of the lower layer and the following have received the message. A copy of the message. When the message 230 moves to the right, the message will fall to the top and bottom ranks 10 15 and 10 106 below. Refer to Figure 24B, "up" bit 224 and "down" bit 226 The starting point is to set 78 paper sizes to the Chinese national standard ((, NS) Λ4 specifications (210X297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)
527798 經潢部中央標準局負工消费合作社印褽 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 定於ONE,其表示該訊息至今未被傳送至下層之任一列。 在第24B圖中,訊息F進入控制單元而未被阻擋,使 得在線BS上之阻擋訊號爲ZERO。訊息F之副本則往下 和往右傳送2432。該控制單元位於下列,因此往右之副 本之”下”位元226被設定爲ZERO以記錄分支已符合 2434。當多元播送訊息之副本被往下傳送2412,往下之 副本之”上”位元224和”下”位元226被重新設定爲ONE, 使得該訊息在下層再度被複製。 請參閱第24C和24D圖,訊息F向右移至與上面單元 連接之一單元。此單元爲下面所阻擋2436且該訊息持續 向右。訊息F之副本最後到達與上面單元連接之未被阻 擋之控制單元。在該單元中,訊息F最後被向下發送243 8 且往右的標頭之”上”位元224被設定爲ZERO 2440。上和 下標記位元現在設定爲ZERO以表示該訊息已在下層被複 製,所以該訊息不再往右傳輸。 第24B,24C和24D圖描述一訊息,其具有多元播送 位元設爲ZERO。該訊息向右移動直至該訊息二度落至下 層之適當列中。當該訊息落下時標記位元224和226會被 設定爲ONE。在此開關中持續此複製直至到達第〇層。 因爲該互連結構包括L個層,所以複製L個,其導致2L 個列包含該訊息之副本。每當該訊息落下時,下層中兩列 的其中一個位於上半部而另一個位於下半<部。此方法可確 保第7圖所述之二次元樹之分支皆可使用。最後結果爲第 0層之所有列接收該訊息之副本。 本紙張尺度適川中國國家標率((、NS ) Λ4規格(210X297公釐) (讀先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)527798 Seal of the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 5. Description of the invention () is set to ONE, which means that the message has not been transmitted to any of the columns below. In Fig. 24B, the message F enters the control unit without being blocked, so that the blocking signal on the line BS is ZERO. A copy of message F is sent 2432 down and right. The control unit is located below, so the "down" bit 226 of the copy to the right is set to ZERO to record that the branch has met 2434. When the copy of the multiplex broadcast message is transmitted down to 2412, the "up" bit 224 and "down" bit 226 of the down copy are reset to ONE, so that the message is copied again in the lower layer. Referring to Figures 24C and 24D, message F moves right to one of the units connected to the unit above. This unit is blocked below 2436 and the message continues to the right. The copy of message F finally reaches the unblocked control unit connected to the above unit. In this unit, the message F is finally sent 243 8 downwards and the "up" bit 224 of the header to the right is set to ZERO 2440. The up and down flag bits are now set to ZERO to indicate that the message has been copied in the lower layer, so the message is no longer transmitted to the right. Figures 24B, 24C and 24D describe a message with a multiplexed broadcast bit set to ZERO. The message moves to the right until the message falls twice to the appropriate column in the lower level. When the message drops, the flag bits 224 and 226 are set to ONE. This copy is continued in this switch until reaching level 0. Because the interconnect structure includes L layers, replicating L, which results in 2L columns containing a copy of the message. Whenever the message falls, one of the two columns in the lower layer is in the upper half and the other is in the lower half <. This method ensures that all branches of the quadratic tree described in Figure 7 can be used. The end result is that all columns of layer 0 receive a copy of the message. The size of this paper is suitable for the national standard of Sichuan ((, NS) Λ4 specification (210X297 mm) (read the precautions on the back before filling in this page)
527798 A7 B7 經滴部中央標準局貝工消费合作社印裂 i、發明説明() 當該訊息源自於該開關之外部時,則產生可選擇之行 位元遮罩228。位元遮罩爲一系列之κ位元,每個代表開 關中之一行。當該位元遮罩之一位元被設定爲ONE,該 訊息朝向對應行之所有列。爲完成一對所有之多元播送, 該行位元遮罩之所有位元起始設爲ZERO,結果所有行和 列接收該訊息。或者,以只設定該位元遮罩元件之子集爲 ONE來選擇行的子集。該省略之行設定爲ZERO。該方法 提供一對多之多元播送能力,其中所有列和唯一選擇之行 接收該訊息。或者,若只有上224和下226標記位元之其 中一個起初設定於ONE且另一個設爲ZERO,那麼只有 第0層之上列或下列接收該訊息。因此,個別設定上224 和下226標記位元以及行位元遮罩228爲ZERO或ONE 將有利於將多元播送訊息導向目標之子集。 在第〇層,多元播送訊息在每列中向右移動,向左循 環且最後橫越所有的行。對p既定的列來說,位元遮罩之 每個位元用於標記是否該訊息在個別行中已被向下傳送。 若該訊息未被下面所阻擋且代表行之位元爲1,那麼該訊 息之副本(最好沒有位元遮罩)被往下傳送。如第1 5B 圖所述,只有通訊位元202和有效載荷206離開該開關。 同時’該訊息之副本也被往右傳送且在位兀遮罩之行位置 設爲ZERO,其表示行目標已符合。若該訊息被阻擋下落, 該訊息持_向右移動且該位兀遮罩未被改變。一被阻檔之 訊息循環且最後再度通過該被阻擋之單元。當該位元遮罩 之所有位元爲ZERO以表示所有目標行已接收該訊息,該 >、纸張尺度適川中國國家標率((、NS ) Λ4規格(210><297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 、11 527798 A7 ___B7五、發明説明() 經濟部中央標準局—工消费合作社印製 訊息在第〇層中不再向右傳輸。 前面描述多元播送一訊息自一輸入埠至第0層之所有 列以及自第〇層之每列至所有行的結構和技術,因而滿足 一對所有傳輸之所欲需求。也描述一對所許多傳輸至選擇 行之所有列。再者,多元播送訊息及非多元播送訊息發送 有助於同時發生在相同開關中。 2D,3D及4D系統 訊息流通控制之拓樸和方法以未限制方式控制規模, 使得開關1 〇〇實施例之可使用輸貫量和效率不是由開關尺 寸的上限所決定。當開關尺寸到達無限時,輸入埠對所有 可能輸入(如第20A,20B和20C圖所討論)之較佳比率 可能在1:3至1:6的範圍中。實際上,對開關1〇〇任何實 施例之最大尺寸的限制爲裝置的接腳數。因此,單一積體 電路晶片實施之最大尺寸受到接腳的限制。期望所製成之 開關具有比技術限制所設定I/O的璋來得多。多重晶片實 施在無實行限制的情況下接受了增加埠數的結構和技術。 下面提供三種方法,稱爲二次元(2D),三次元(3D) 和四次元(4D)互連方法。 請參閱第25A,25B和25C圖,其顯示用於”nD”多重 晶片開關之訊息佈局。用於2D開關之訊息25 02具有兩 個標頭208和2508。用於3D開關之訊息2504具有三個 標頭208,2508和25 10。用於4D開關乏訊息25 06具有 四個標頭 208,2508,2510 和 2512。 請參閱第26A圖並配合第1,3和25A圖,2D開關2600 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)527798 A7 B7 Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, i. Description of the invention () When the message originates from outside the switch, a selectable bit mask 228 is generated. The bit mask is a series of k-bits, each representing a row in the switch. When one bit of the bit mask is set to ONE, the message is directed to all columns of the corresponding row. In order to complete a pair of all-multicast, all the bits of the bit mask of the row are initially set to ZERO. As a result, all the rows and columns receive the message. Alternatively, select only a subset of the bit mask components as ONE to select a subset of rows. This omitted line is set to ZERO. This method provides one-to-many multicast capabilities, where all columns and only selected rows receive the message. Alternatively, if only one of the upper 224 and lower 226 flag bits is initially set to ONE and the other is set to ZERO, then only the message above or below the layer 0 is received. Therefore, individually setting the upper 224 and lower 226 flag bits and the row bit mask 228 to ZERO or ONE will be beneficial to directing the multi-cast message to a subset of the target. At layer 0, the multicast message moves right in each column, loops left, and finally traverses all rows. For a given column of p, each bit of the bit mask is used to mark whether the message has been transmitted downward in an individual row. If the message is not blocked below and the representative bit is 1, then a copy of the message (preferably without a bit mask) is transmitted down. As shown in Figure 15B, only the communication bit 202 and the payload 206 leave the switch. At the same time, a copy of the message is also transmitted to the right and the position of the in-place mask is set to ZERO, which indicates that the line goal has been met. If the message is blocked from falling, the message moves to the right and the mask is not changed. A blocked message cycles and finally passes through the blocked unit again. When all the bits of the bit mask are ZERO to indicate that all target rows have received the message, the > paper size is suitable for the China National Standard ((, NS) Λ4 specification (210 > < 297 mm) ) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page), 11 527798 A7 ___B7 V. Description of Invention () The messages printed by the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs-Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives will not be transmitted to the right in the 0th layer. The structure and technology of multiplexing a message from an input port to all columns of layer 0 and from each column of layer 0 to all rows, thus satisfying the desired requirements of a pair of all transmissions. Also describes a pair of many transmissions to Select all the rows of the row. Furthermore, multicast and non-multicast messages can be sent in the same switch at the same time. The topology and methods of 2D, 3D, and 4D system message flow control are controlled in an unlimited way, so that The usable output and efficiency of the switch 100 embodiment are not determined by the upper limit of the switch size. When the switch size reaches infinite, the input port is for all possible inputs (as shown in Figures 20A, 20B and 20C). The preferred ratio may be in the range of 1: 3 to 1: 6. In fact, the limit on the maximum size of any embodiment of the switch 1000 is the number of pins of the device. Therefore, a single integrated circuit chip is implemented The maximum size is limited by the pins. It is expected that the manufactured switch will have much more I / O than the technical limit. The multi-chip implementation accepts the structure and technology of increasing the number of ports without implementing restrictions. Below Three methods are provided, called 2D, 3D, and 4D interconnection methods. See Figures 25A, 25B, and 25C for a message layout for "nD" multichip switches . Message for 2D switch 25 02 has two headers 208 and 2508. Message for 3D switch 2504 has three headers 208, 2508 and 25 10. Message for 4D switch lacks 25 06 with four headers 208, 2508, 2510 and 2512. Please refer to Figure 26A in conjunction with Figures 1, 3 and 25A, 2D switch 2600 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)
本紙張尺度適州中國國家標率((、NS ) Λ4規格(210X 297公楚) 527798 A7 ---- ---B7 五、發明説明() (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 由連接兩個疊式儲存器2610和2612所形成,每個疊式儲 存器包含複數個C之開關100單晶片實施2602。2D開關 2600之一較佳實施例,C爲第0層之列數。兩個疊式儲 存器以匯流排連接2604之特殊排列所連接。在第一疊式 儲存器2610中的晶片2620之每個輸出2604連接至第二 疊式儲存器中每個晶片2632,2634,2636和2638之一輸 入。訊息25 06之標頭208決定輸出2604該訊息至何處。 進入任何輸入埠2622之訊息被傳送至第二疊式儲存器 2612中任何晶片之輸入埠。如第10圖所討論,當訊息2502 通過第一疊式儲存器2610的晶片2620時會去除該標頭 208 〇 經濟部中决標準局员工消费合作社印^. 進入第二疊式儲存器之一積體電路晶片2630之訊息 25 02以與標頭208完全相同之方式處理該標頭2508。因 此,標頭2508與前面所討論之標頭208同樣用於進入第 二疊式儲存器2612之訊息。進入連接匯流排2604之任何 輸入之訊息期望能被傳送至目標輸出2640。也請參閱第 26B圖,兩個疊式儲存器2610和2612之所得結構(如上 面所描述之互連方式)在此意指一 ”扭曲立方”,其表示一 疊式儲存器相對於另一個而扭曲90度。在開關100之適 合2D實施例中,連接匯流排2604包括所有輸出埠154 組及在相同列位址2206之個別佔用訊號埠376而省略 FIFO緩衝器152。爲簡化時序的考量,在蠱式儲存器2610 之輸出行埠154連接至第二疊式儲存器2612之相同行之 輸入埠104,且同樣地用於連接佔用訊號376至相同行埠 -------Ώ,- 本紙張尺度適州中國囤家標導((、NS ) Λ4規格(210X 297公釐) 527798 一 經满部中央標準局負工消费合作社印紫 A7 B7 發明説明() 佔用訊號304。給定兩個包含複數個C積體電路晶片之疊 式儲存器,輸出位址2620之總數爲C2。 請參閱第27圖並配合第25B圖,其顯示3D互連開關。 應用第27圖說明之用於連接匯流排2604在該佈局所描述 之相同互連方法,熟習該技藝人士能夠組裝較高次元之開 關。該3D開關包括三層2710,2720及2730,每層包括 C個積體電路晶片之C個堆疊。在該3D開關27 00之較 佳實施例,C爲晶片第0層的列數。訊息25 04的3個列 標頭208,250 8及25 10決定該訊息之輸出位址2720。輸 出位址之總數爲C3。 請參閱第28圖並配合第25C圖,其顯示4D互連開關。 應用第28圖說明之用於連接匯流排2604在佈局所描述之 相同互連方法,熟習該技藝人士能夠組裝較高次元之開 關。該4D開關包括兩個方形矩陣2810及2820,每個矩 陣包括C2個扭曲立方2600。在該4D開關28 00之一實施 例,C爲晶片第0層的列數。訊息25 06之4個列標頭208, 25 08,2510及25 12決定該訊息之輸出位址2220。輸出位 址之總數爲C4。 分裂標頭開關 用於如超級電腦網路之高速系統之開關的主要設計目 的爲低潛候期。第18A,18B,18C和19圖所討論之控制 和拓蹼之平坦潛候期系統及第16A和16'B圖所討論之高 速時序控制以及結合兩者用於減少訊息通過開關100之實 施例之潛候期或通過時間。在目前所討論之實例中,訊息 本紙張尺度適ffl中國國家標卒(CNS ) Λ4規格(2丨0X297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明( 經滴部中央標準局员J-消费合作社印到衣 之所有標頭位元在第一有效載荷位元進入之前進入開關 100之實施例,其表示該標頭之長度(用於一既定之I/O 速度)決定絕對最少潛候期。第29A和29B圖描述一分 離標頭實施例,其減少兩倍的時間且減少兩倍有效載荷通 過該開關的時間。 請參閱第29A圖,訊息200被外部”分離’成兩個訊息 2902和2904,每個訊息具有一半之原來長度。另外之標 頭位元204分別形成爲該分裂訊息的個別標頭。在偶數位 置2910之標頭位元變成訊息A 2902之標頭,且同樣地奇 數位元2912變成訊息B 2902之標頭。該有效載荷204分 成兩半,其分別形成二個訊息之有效載荷2914和2916。 請參閱第29B圖並配合第1和20A圖,其顯示一分裂 標頭開關。該開關包括兩部份T 2924及U 2926。每部份 在主29 3 0及從2032控制陣列之交替層中形成。除了控制 單元之內部詳細說明之外,一部分等於第一圖所示之開關 100。主控制陣列層2930包含前面所述之控制陣列120, 其加入控制流通匯流排2922。控制匯流排2922包含R個 路徑,其中R爲該層之列數。每個控制路徑之輸入線連 接至每個主控制單元之佈局輸出以及傳送或複製設置於相 同層相同情況之從屬控制單元之閂鎖。控制流通匯流排 2922傳送在一層中之所有主控制單元之所有閂鎖設置。 一控制路徑之輸出線連接至該從屬控制單元之閂鎖。在主 控制單元之邏輯閘處理和設置閂鎖在該單元之中。從屬控 制單元則省略處理該標頭之邏輯閘以及移除第一標頭位元 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標缚(CNS ) A4^ ( 210X29^t ] 527798 A7 _____B7五、發明説明() 經漪部中央標隼局貨工消费合作社印製 之邏輯元件。 在訊息B 2904在輸入璋2928進入該部分U2926的同 時,訊息A 2902於輸入埠2926進入開關2900之部分T2924 之頂層。當該訊息向下移動至底下一層時,該第一標頭位 元29 1 0自訊息A中移除。該訊息B與該訊息A同步移動, 因此在該訊息A移動的同時,該訊息B向下或向右移動。 在底下一層中,該訊息B進入主控制單元且其移動爲該 訊息A所複製,其以自主要至從屬複製閂鎖設置。當該 訊息B向下移動時,該第一標頭位元2912被移除。也請 參閱第12A圖,開關2900之時序允許此二位元在單一時 脈週期Π10中移動。因此,每個時脈週期位元以兩層之 速率向下移動。在該底下一層中,該訊息A再度進入主 控制單元。當訊息向下移動至底層,訊息A與訊息B交 替通過主控制單元以及失去標頭位元。每個訊息在每兩層 和每一時脈週期中失去一個位元。 複製一層中所有控制單元之所有閂鎖狀態之槪念可延 伸至超過兩部份。例如,若訊息200以第29A圖所描述 之模式分裂成3或4或更多個訊息,那麼用於分裂訊息設 定之流通時間由訊息所得之數目來分。每層只有一個主控 制部份,其他部份爲從屬。在往下的層中該主要部份在所 有部分中旋轉。 光學訊息佈局 第30A圖顯示一光學訊息之佈局.。該第一位元202宣 佈一訊息之存在且作爲一時序位元。標頭位元(Η 1,H2,·., (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 辦· 線·ι ________- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標率((、奶)八4規格(210父297公釐) 527798 Α7 Β7 經浸部中央標準局兵工消费合作社印製 i、發明説明()This paper is suitable for China's national standard rate ((, NS) Λ4 specification (210X 297 Gongchu) 527798 A7 ---- --- B7 V. Description of the invention () (Read the precautions on the back before filling this page ) It is formed by connecting two stacked storages 2610 and 2612, each stacked storage contains a plurality of C switches 100 single chip implementation 2602. One of the preferred embodiments of the 2D switch 2600, C is the 0th level column The two stacked storages are connected in a special arrangement of bus connection 2604. Each output 2604 of the wafer 2620 in the first stacked storage 2610 is connected to each of the chips 2632 in the second stacked storage, Input one of 2634, 2636 and 2638. The header 208 of message 25 06 determines where to output the message 2604. The message entering any input port 2622 is transmitted to the input port of any chip in the second stack storage 2612. As discussed in FIG. 10, when the message 2502 passes through the chip 2620 of the first stacker 2610, the header 208 will be removed 208. The stamp is printed by the staff consumer cooperative of the Bureau of Standards and Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The body circuit chip 2630 message 25 02 ends with the header 208 The header 2508 is processed in exactly the same way. Therefore, the header 2508 is the same as the header 208 discussed previously for the message entering the second stacker 2612. Any input message entering the connection bus 2604 is expected to be Teleport to target output 2640. See also Figure 26B. The resulting structure of the two stacked storages 2610 and 2612 (interconnected as described above) here means a "twisted cube", which means a stacked The memory is twisted 90 degrees relative to the other. In a suitable 2D embodiment of the switch 100, the connection bus 2604 includes all 154 sets of output ports and the individually occupied signal port 376 at the same column address 2206, and the FIFO buffer 152 is omitted To simplify timing considerations, the output port 154 of the flash memory 2610 is connected to the input port 104 of the same row of the second stack memory 2612, and is also used to connect the occupation signal 376 to the same port-- ----- Ώ,-This paper size is suitable for Chinese storehouses in Shizhou ((, NS) Λ4 size (210X 297mm) 527798 Once the Ministry of Standards and Construction Co-operative Consumer Cooperatives printed A7 B7 invention description () Occupy signal 30 4. Given two stacked memories containing multiple C integrated circuit chips, the total number of output addresses 2620 is C2. Please refer to Figure 27 and cooperate with Figure 25B, which shows the 3D interconnect switch. Application 27 The figure illustrates the same interconnection method used to connect the bus 2604 described in this layout. Those skilled in the art can assemble higher-dimensional switches. The 3D switch includes three layers of 2710, 2720, and 2730, and each layer includes C products. C stacks of bulk circuit wafers. In the preferred embodiment of the 3D switch 27 00, C is the number of columns of the 0th layer of the wafer. The three column headers 208, 250 8 and 25 10 of the message 25 04 determine the output address 2720 of the message. The total number of output addresses is C3. Refer to Figure 28 and Figure 25C, which shows the 4D interconnect switch. Using the same interconnection method described in Figure 28 for connecting the bus 2604 in the layout, those skilled in the art can assemble higher-dimensional switches. The 4D switch includes two square matrices 2810 and 2820, each matrix including C2 twisted cubes 2600. In one embodiment of the 4D switch 2800, C is the number of columns of the 0th layer of the wafer. The 4 column headers 208, 25 08, 2510, and 25 12 of the message 25 06 determine the output address 2220 of the message. The total number of output addresses is C4. Split header switch The main design purpose of switches for high-speed systems such as supercomputer networks is low latency. 18A, 18B, 18C, and 19 The flat latency system of the control and topology discussed in FIGS. 18A and 16'B, and the high-speed timing control discussed in FIGS. 16A and 16'B, and an embodiment combining the two for reducing message passing through the switch 100 Latency or transit time. In the examples currently discussed, the paper size of this message is suitable for the Chinese National Standards (CNS) Λ4 specification (2 丨 0X297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (The embodiment where all header bits printed by J-Consumer Cooperative Co., Ltd. of the Central Bureau of Didi enter the switch 100 before the first payload bit enters, which indicates the length of the header (for a given I / O speed) determines the absolute minimum latency. Figures 29A and 29B describe an example of a split header that reduces the time by two times and the time it takes the payload to pass through the switch by twice. See Figure 29A, Message 200 is "separated" externally into two messages 2902 and 2904, each message having half its original length. In addition, the header bits 204 are formed as individual headers of the split message. The header bits at the even position 2910 Becomes the header of message A 2902, and likewise the odd bit 2912 becomes the header of message B 2902. The payload 204 is divided into two halves, which respectively form the payloads 2914 and 2916 of the two messages. See FIG. 29B In conjunction with Figures 1 and 20A, it shows a split header switch. The switch includes two sections T 2924 and U 2926. Each section is formed in alternating layers of the main 29 30 and the 2032 control array. Except for the control unit Except for the internal detailed description, a part is equal to the switch 100 shown in the first figure. The main control array layer 2930 includes the control array 120 described above, which is added to control the circulation bus 2922. The control bus 2922 contains R paths, where R It is the number of the layer. The input line of each control path is connected to the layout output of each master control unit and the latch of the slave control unit that is set or transmitted in the same situation on the same layer. The control circulation bus 2922 is transmitted on one layer All latch settings of all master control units in the system. An output line of a control path is connected to the latch of the slave control unit. The logic gates in the master control unit handle and set the latches in the unit. The slave control unit is Omit the logic gate of this header and remove the first header bit (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to Chinese national standard (CNS) A4 ^ (210X29 ^ t) 527798 A7 _____B7 V. Description of the invention () Logic element printed by the Cargo Workers and Consumers Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. At the same time that the message B 2904 is entered into the part U2926 and entered into U2926 , Message A 2902 enters the top of part T2924 of switch 2900 at input port 2926. When the message moves down to the bottom layer, the first header bit 29 1 0 is removed from message A. The message B and the Message A moves synchronously, so while message A moves, message B moves down or right. In the bottom layer, the message B enters the master control unit and its movement is copied by the message A, which is set from the master to the slave copy latch. When the message B moves down, the first header bit 2912 is removed. Please also refer to Figure 12A. The timing of switch 2900 allows these two bits to move in a single clock cycle Π10. Therefore, each clock cycle bit moves down at a rate of two levels. In the bottom layer, the message A enters the main control unit again. When the message moves down to the bottom, message A and message B pass through the main control unit and lose the header bit. Each message loses one bit in every two layers and every clock cycle. The idea of replicating all latch states of all control units in a layer can be extended to more than two parts. For example, if the message 200 is split into 3 or 4 or more messages in the pattern described in FIG. 29A, the flow time setting used to split the message is divided by the number of messages obtained. Each layer has only one master control part, and the other parts are slaves. In the lower layer the main part rotates in all parts. Optical Message Layout Figure 30A shows the layout of an optical message. The first bit 202 announces the existence of a message and acts as a timing bit. Header bits (Η 1, H2, ·., (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Do · Line · ι ________- This paper size is applicable to China's national standard ((, milk) 8 4 specifications ( 210 Father 297 mm) 527798 Α7 Β7 Printed by the Military Industrial Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Baptist Ministry i. Invention Description ()
Hu )3 002在光學訊息中具有與電子訊息202相同之功能。 在一實施例中,該標頭位元3002在光學標頭中彼此相間 隔,其方式相似於電子標頭204中之間隔。在另一實施例 中,所有標頭位元佔去光纖中相同實體空間,因此同時發 生,但是使用η種不同顏色,此技術稱爲波長分割多工 (WDM)。在此方式中,使用η種不同獲得之波長(I, h,…,ln)。波長位置(wavelength slot) lk的光存在傳達 與時間位置(time slot) Hk的光存在相同之資料。在另一 實施例中,使用混合的方式。例如,可使用n/2波長佔用 兩個時間位置。該光學有效載荷3010載送資料及在光學 訊息中提供如同於電子有效載荷206用於電子訊息200之 目的。第30A圖說明載送於多重時間位置與波長位置之 有效載荷資料。提供停頓時間(dead time) 3 008以允許 電子追趕上光子以及計算在光纖中傳送之光學訊號之顫動 (jitter)。 光學控制單元 請參閱第30B圖並配合第3 0A圖,其顯示電子光學控 制單元3030之一實施例。爲光學訊號3000形式之資料藉 由輸入線NW3036和S303 8進入單元3030。資料藉由輸 出線SE3034和N3032離開單元。若該單元3030不在最 上層,那麼藉由輸出埠N3 034離開單元之訊息Μ將直接 由上進入該單元之輸入埠S303 8。若該章元在最下層,那 麼離開輸出捧Ν3032之資料將離開該開關。若該單元303 0 不在最下層,那麼藉由輸入線SE3034離開單元之資料將 本紙張尺度適川中國國家標率((、NS ) Λ4規格(210Χ 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 、11 527798 A7 B7 經消部中央標準局β〈工消费合作社印製 i、發明説明() 藉由輸入埠NE3 036進入另一單元。 單元3030之操作相似於單元1 300之操作。單元3030 爲開關之第J層之一單元。AND閘3 040只有ONE輸出, 其爲時序位元202在time window期間到達AND閘3040 之處,其中閂鎖設定3002爲高狀態。時序位元202爲藉 由輸入埠3 03 6進入該單元之訊息標頭之第一位元。時序 位元202穿過光纖接頭3066且由Ο/E元件3062將其轉 換成電子。閂鎖設定脈衝3002自時序來源3042到達閘極 3 040。當AND閘3 04 0由ZERO變成ONE,延遲元件3044 在一時間延遲dh 3016之後設定閂鎖L3046爲ONE,該時 間延遲dh爲時序位元202與標頭位元3 002之間的時間。 閂鎖 3046爲一正緣取樣保持電路(positive-edge, sample-and-hold circuit)(配合閘極 3040 和 3050),其 捕獲和保持標頭位元3002之値。因此閂鎖3046可作爲一 靜態一位元暫存器。 目前,由輸入線S3038進入單元3030之光學訊號之 一小部份由無源光纖接頭(passive fiber tap)3064導向0/E 轉換元件3048。元件3 048具有兩種功能,一個功能是自 藉由輸入3038進入開關之訊息偵測光學第一標頭位元 202。若無偵測到位元,元件3048具有輸出値ZERO。若 偵測到標頭位元202,元件3048產生一高電子訊號(ONE) 持續一段期間dh 3008,此期間爲用於整'個光學標頭通過 一給定點之時間。閂鎖3046只有在進入通過輸入3 03 8之 訊息之時序位元爲ONE或第J層之標頭位元爲ONE的情 本紙張尺度適用中國國冢標率(CNS ) Λ4規格(210X297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Hu) 3 002 has the same function as the electronic message 202 in the optical message. In one embodiment, the header bits 3002 are spaced apart from each other in the optical header in a manner similar to that in the electronic header 204. In another embodiment, all header bits occupy the same physical space in the fiber and therefore occur simultaneously, but using n different colors. This technique is called wavelength division multiplexing (WDM). In this way, n differently obtained wavelengths (I, h, ..., ln) are used. The presence of light at the wavelength slot lk conveys the same information as the existence of the light at the time slot Hk. In another embodiment, a hybrid approach is used. For example, two time positions can be occupied using the n / 2 wavelength. The optical payload 3010 carries data and provides in the optical message the same purpose as the electronic payload 206 for the electronic message 200. Figure 30A illustrates payload data carried at multiple time and wavelength positions. A dead time of 3 008 is provided to allow electrons to catch up to photons and calculate jitter of optical signals transmitted in the fiber. Optical Control Unit Refer to FIG. 30B and cooperate with FIG. 30A, which shows an embodiment of the electronic optical control unit 3030. Data in the form of optical signal 3000 enters unit 3030 via input lines NW3036 and S303 8. The data leaves the unit via the output lines SE3034 and N3032. If the unit 3030 is not at the top level, the message M leaving the unit through output port N3 034 will directly enter the unit's input port S303 8 from above. If the chapter element is at the lowest level, then the data leaving the output N3032 will leave the switch. If the unit 3030 is not at the lowest level, then the paper leaving the unit through the input line SE3034 will adjust the paper size to the national standard of China ((, NS) Λ4 specifications (210 × 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back first) (Fill in this page again), 11 527798 A7 B7, Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs β <Printed by Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives, Invention Description () Enter another unit through input port NE3 036. The operation of unit 3030 is similar to that of unit 1 300 Operation. Unit 3030 is a unit of layer J of the switch. AND gate 3 040 has only ONE output, which is where timing bit 202 reaches AND gate 3040 during time window, where the latch setting 3002 is high. Timing bit Element 202 is the first bit of the message header that enters the unit through input port 3 03 6. The timing bit 202 passes through the fiber connector 3066 and is converted into an electron by the 0 / E element 3062. The latch setting pulse 3002 Since the timing source 3042 reaches the gate 3 040. When the AND gate 3 04 0 changes from ZERO to ONE, the delay element 3044 sets the latch L3046 to ONE after a time delay of dh 3016, the time delay dh is the timing bit 202 and the header Bits 3 to 002 The latch 3046 is a positive-edge (sample-and-hold circuit) (in conjunction with the gates 3040 and 3050), which captures and holds the header bit 3002. Therefore, the latch 3046 can As a static one-bit register. At present, a small part of the optical signal entering the unit 3030 from the input line S3038 is guided by the passive fiber tap 3064 to the 0 / E conversion element 3048. Element 3 048 has Two functions, one function is to detect the optical first header bit 202 by entering the information of the switch through input 3038. If no bit is detected, the element 3048 has an output 値 ZERO. If the header bit 202 is detected The element 3048 generates a high electronic signal (ONE) for a period of dh 3008. This period is the time for the entire optical head to pass a given point. The latch 3046 is only at the timing of entering the message passing the input 3 03 8 The bit size is ONE or the header of layer J. The bit size is ONE. The size of this paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard Rate (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)
、1T 527798 A7 B7五、發明説明() 經濟部中*標绛局Μ工消费合作$印絮 況下才會產生一高脈衝(ONE)。單元3030爲連接至下 面一層之單元中上列組716之一單元。連接至下面一層之 下列組718之一單元具有閘極3052爲閘極3050所取代。 在標頭位元轉換成電子及電子裝置設定電吸收調諧器 (electro-absorption modulator)3054 和 3056 的期間,訊息 Μ儲存於延遲迴路3060之中。訊息Μ由延遲迴路3060 前進至3dD分解器(splitter)3058。分解器3058遞送與訊 息Μ相同之副本至電吸收調諧器3054和3056。只有電 吸收調諧器3054和3056之其中一個在一既定時間爲透 明,因此,允許光線藉由輸出埠3032和3034的其中一個 離開單元3030。元件3054和3056仍留在閂鎖L3 046所 設定之固定狀態,直至閂鎖3046改變狀態,至少直至下 一閂鎖設定訊號3002到達爲止。 單元3030是使用電吸收調諧器所建構而成。熟習該 技藝之人士能夠修改該單元以半導體光學放大器或鋰鐵閘 極(lithium niobate gate)取代該電吸收調諧器。 光學輸入單元 也請參閱第30E圖,控制單元3030位於開關3070之 所有層,除了頂層或輸入層之外。第3 0C圖說明一種電 子光學輸入單元3092,其只位於開關3070之輸入層。光 學訊號E3000在通訊位元202與其他訊息同步由輸入單 元3 091進入開關的時候由外部組成。尤~其,時序就是若 外部訊息E由輸入303 7進入單元3092,且同時另一訊息 B由線S3 03 8進入該單元,以及電子光學開關3054設爲 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ---------^- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標卒(CNS ) Λ4規格(210X 297公釐) 527798 A7 _______B7五、發明説明() 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 透明’那麼每一訊息之通訊位元同時到達光纖3034。在 至一產生時脈位移暫存器1100之電子訊息目標中,光纖 中資料流或訊息3000之本性爲資料不會維持在靜態,直 至較晚時間釋放該資料爲止。一光學訊號3000總是在移 動中。因此,輸入單元3092總是在輸入3037接收一適當 計時訊息3000。 在來自向下方向303 8之訊息B 3000之情況中,訊息 B由前面討論之元件來偵測,且在外部訊息E到達調諧器 3054之前,閂鎖3046設爲ONE。在訊息B進入單元3092 之後,該調諧器3054設爲非透明,吸收外部訊息E,且 在線BN3033上之電子佔用訊號向上傳送至外部裝置,其 表示該訊息不爲開關3037所接收。該外部裝置接續建構 另一訊息E以注入於下一閂鎖設定3002週期中。’ 或者,當外部訊號E 3000由輸入3037進入單元3092 且無訊息到達線S 303 8時,訊息E通過電子光學開關3054 以在上層離開該單元和進入第3層之控制單元3030。線 BN 3033上之佔用訊號表示至外部裝置之訊息不爲開關所 接收。 在一實施例中,開關3070之第0層單元接收光學控 制訊號,其表示在輸出裝置中存有空間給一訊息。在此實 施例中,第〇層之單元與其他層之單元3030相同。在另 一實施例中,開關之第〇層控制單元接收電子控制訊號以 表示輸出裝置.無法接收一訊息200。在此實施例中,第0 層之單元與第1層之單元些微不同’其中光纖輸出3038 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫 訂 -線 ________ - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明( 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 和相關的Ο/E轉換器4048爲單獨電子連接所取代。 光學開關 第30E圖顯示光纖,控制單元及光學開關3070之其 他元件的互連結構。此圖相似於第17圖,此外,開關3070 可具有其他行(圖未示)。且非所有的行必須同等相間隔, 使得在一對相鄰行之間的光纖3086之長度不是在所有的 行皆相同。訊息自頂部3072進入而自底部3076離開。 也請參閱第17圖,在一列中向右移動之訊息可優先 向下掉落或持續向右,直至該訊息到達一控制單元以允許 該訊息最後向下移動。離開控制單元A 3030和優先向右 移動之光學訊號Μ 3000自線N 3080離開單元A,其中該 線N連接於至線S 303 8上之至上層的該單元B。光學訊 號總是沿對角路徑3082由線SE 3034離開單元B。單元 B連接於線SE而至下行下列之單元C,使得單元C直接 至單元A之右邊。明顯約圓形行徑的目的爲該訊息Μ可 以即時提供訊息以阻擋單元Β之另一訊息優先自單元Β 移至單元C。在下層之訊息Μ優先於在較上層之訊息, 如第8Α和8Β圖描述所討論。事實上,訊息流通,移動 順序及在光學開關3070中發生之阻擋與電子訊息200移 動通過相同組態之開關1 700的情況相同。 每個控制單元之一 3dD分離器結合光纖接頭3066和 3064之光能量之少量流失造成光學訊號振幅之衰減。爲 調節訊號的流失,放大器和再生器3090插入於一些行之 間。再生器3090執行兩種功能:放大該光學訊號3000爲 請 先 閱 讀 背 之 注 意 事 項 再 填 m 訂 線 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 527798 A7 __B7五、發明説明() 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 足夠的強度以進一步處理,以及改變或再生光纖所載送之 二進資料,改善訊號及噪音品質。在使用半導體光學放大 器或鋰鐵閘極之另一實施例中,訊號通過系統會減弱,故 需要再生。 訊息Μ可在一既定時間跨過一行以上。事實上,訊息 之前面位元可以在訊息之後面位元進入該開關之前離開該 開關。在開關3070之一實施例中,來自右邊之輸出線直 接連接至在左邊之相同層之輸入線。在此實施例中,整個 訊息完全適合在一層中,以確保訊息之第一位元不會環繞 一列並與訊息之另一部份相衝撞。此特性可應用於電子和 光學的實施。應注意所有的訊息一般是不會有相同的長 度。 開關3070之時序控制使得訊息同時到達既定層和行 之所有單元。作爲圖示說明之實例,考慮具有三行之第30Ε 圖之實施例和具有控制單元之四層以及具有輸出單元之另 一層。第〇行與第1行之間的距離等於第1行與第2行之 間的距離,但小於第2行至第0行的距離。將該開關設計 成載送兩種長度之訊息,即短訊息S和長訊息Μ。右手 邊之輸出埠3085直接連接於在相同列之輸入埠3083。此 外,短訊息S適合在相同列之二節點之間。因此,對在 第R列,第W層和第C行之單元Α以及在第U列,第W 層和第C+1行之單元B而言,若訊息自單元A移至單元 B,那麼在訊息S之第一標頭位元到達單元B的時間t時, 訊息S之最後標頭位元已經在單元A之節點左邊。 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫 、-ιτ 線 --:-^4- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 527798 A7 __B7五、發明説明() 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 在另一實例中,一訊息待在一既定層足夠長的時間以 通過四個節點。一時脈X不規則滴答且出現狀態0,1和 2。在一參考時間t(0),時脈X開始且讀取0。短訊息在 時間〇插入第一行之輸入單元3 03 0。一短訊息在時間〇 插入至第0行之開關。該訊息未偏離且具有第一標頭位 元,其在時間^到達在第一行第3層之單元。該訊息S 仍留在第3層且具有第一標頭位元,其在時間t2到達在 第2行第3層之單元。該訊息S仍留在第3層且具有第 一標頭位元,其在時間t3到達在第0行第3層之單元。 一延遲時間D1定義爲。一延遲時間D2定義爲t3-t2 該時脈X在時間D1自狀態ZERO變成狀態ONE,在畤間 2*D1自狀態ONE變成狀態TWO以及在時間2*D1+D2自 狀態TWO變成狀態ZERO。此期間以此方式延伸,使得 該時脈X將在時間2*D1+D2自狀態ZERO變成狀態ONE。 使用簡單規則將訊息插入至該開關。當時脈轉變成狀 態t,短訊息被插入在第t行之輸入控制單元。若該短訊 息可以在時間t被插入在第C行之輸入控制單元,那麼長 訊息可以在時間t + D 1被插入在第C行之輸入控制單元。 因此,該短訊息可被對準且該長訊息也可被對準。該開關 時序之其餘部份則端視單元間之光纖長度及延遲迴路之長 度。該光纖與延遲迴路的長度可以調整。使得訊息到達一 既定單元3030而至輸入埠NW3036和S3 038,以此方式 可使電子準確地操作該開關。該延遲迴路3060被製成適 當尺寸,使得在該開關切換之後通過此迴路之訊息到達電 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫 訂 線 ___92_ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 527798 A7 ______ B7五、發明説明() 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 子光學開關3054和3056。最後,調整延遲迴路3068使 得自任何埠到達之訊息同時離開該單元。 混合電子/光學控制 請參閱第29B圖,一主/從關係可有效移動資料通過一 開關。一開關2900執行控制功能,其中主和從實施配合 相同拓蹼和訊息流通系統使得主要部份可以驅動從屬部 份。該從屬部份依據訊息的通過而被動作用。主和從相對 於訊息的流通在功能上是相同但在時序上有差異,可調整 時序差異以提供成功的開關1 00之主從實施例。尤其,基 於具有較長有效載荷206之訊息之最低可能潛候期的目 的,以控制具有只處理訊息標頭之電子開關之快且非常高 頻寬之光學開關來獲得.好處。 該混合電子/光學結合有助於利用兩者技術之最好特色 以配合產生一超低潛候期及非常高頻寬開關。請參閱第 30A和30B圖,一光學訊息3000具有較長的黑暗時間3008 及長標頭3004,包含”肥”(較長的期間)光學位元3002, 其可爲控制單元3030內之光學/電子裝置處理。換句話 說,光學訊息3000之有效載荷3010部份爲整個訊息長度 之一小部份。寬標頭位元和黑暗時間3008對考量光學時 序中之顫動爲必須的。以避免使用昂貴的高速偵測器及電 子光學開關可減少每個控制單元3030的成本。用於標頭 和控制處理的時間由延遲迴路3060和3068來調整,其以 一公尺長度之等級。再者’在每個控制單元中重複未產生 之延遲迴路延遲。另一方面’當在光學有效載荷3010進 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填· 訂 線 ___;_____93- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 527798 A7 B7五、發明説明() 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 入之前重新設定開關3070中之所有閂鎖3046時,沒有使 用延遲迴路且該控制單元以相鄰方式排列,產生一等級以 上的震度以減少流通時間或通過該開關之光學有效載荷潛 候期。 請參閱第30B和31圖,控制單元3030之高速電子光 學轉換器3048和3 062爲昂貴的且適合之快速切換電吸收 調諧器也是花費高。一光學從屬單元3100去除此二E/0 轉換器並使用低速電子光學開關3124。單元3100在成本 上少一等級,在速度上高一等級。相同拓蹼和訊息流通之 電子開關只處理包括通訊位元202和列標頭204之訊息標 頭。因爲無有效載荷可處理,所以在電子開關中無使用資 料輸出埠154。 使用第16B圖討論中所描述之快速邏輯,在最後標頭 位元已進入該開關之後,既定行之電子開關1620的所有 閂鎖設定爲一個時脈週期。例如,以500Hz執行之具有11 個標頭位元之第1 〇層開關使用約20奈秒設定該閂鎖 3 1 1 6。請參閱第29B圖之分裂標頭開關及使用高速技術, 設定時間降至1 〇奈秒。在標頭位元向下移動通過該電子 開關的同時,每個閂鎖1616之狀態在外部複製給光學從 屬單兀3100。應注思的是因爲在一'列和層之問鎖依序由 左至右設定,所以一或多列之設定由單一輸出接腳3114 傳輸。使用用於包括每列和行交叉處之每個控制陣列之一 時序閃光訊號(timing strobe signal)3110以產生閂鎖狀態 訊號和複製該訊號3 1 24給該光學從屬單元閂鎖3 1 28。閂 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫^頁)1T 527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () A high pulse (ONE) will only be generated in the case of the Ministry of Economic Affairs * Standards Bureau's M-industrial cooperation $ printing. The unit 3030 is one of the upper group 716 of the units connected to the lower layer. One of the following groups 718 connected to the lower layer has a gate 3052 replaced by a gate 3050. During the conversion of the header bits into the electronic and electronic device setting electro-absorption modulators 3054 and 3056, the message M is stored in the delay circuit 3060. The message M advances from the delay loop 3060 to a 3dD splitter 3058. The resolver 3058 delivers the same copy as the message M to the electroabsorption tuners 3054 and 3056. Only one of the electro-absorption tuners 3054 and 3056 is transparent at a given time. Therefore, light is allowed to leave the unit 3030 through one of the output ports 3032 and 3034. The components 3054 and 3056 remain in the fixed state set by the latch L3 046 until the latch 3046 changes state, at least until the next latch setting signal 3002 arrives. The unit 3030 is constructed using an electro-absorption tuner. Those skilled in the art can modify the unit to replace the electro-absorption tuner with a semiconductor optical amplifier or lithium niobate gate. Optical input unit See also Fig. 30E. The control unit 3030 is located on all layers of the switch 3070 except the top layer or the input layer. FIG. 30C illustrates an electronic optical input unit 3092, which is located only on the input layer of the switch 3070. The optical signal E3000 is externally composed when the communication bit 202 is synchronized with other messages and entered by the input unit 3 091. Especially ~, the sequence is if the external message E enters the unit 3092 by input 303 7 and at the same time another message B enters the unit by the line S3 03 8 and the electronic optical switch 3054 is set (please read the precautions on the back before filling (This page) --------- ^-This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standards (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X 297 mm) 527798 A7 _______B7 V. Description of the invention () Staff consumption of the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs The cooperative prints 'transparent' so that the communication bits of each message reach the optical fiber 3034 at the same time. In the electronic message target to a clock displacement register 1100, the nature of the data stream or message 3000 in the optical fiber is that the data will not remain static until the data is released at a later time. An optical signal 3000 is always moving. Therefore, the input unit 3092 always receives an appropriate timing message 3000 at input 3037. In the case of the message B 3000 from the downward direction 3038, the message B is detected by the previously discussed element, and the latch 3046 is set to ONE before the external message E reaches the tuner 3054. After message B enters unit 3092, the tuner 3054 is set to be non-transparent and absorbs external message E, and the electronic occupancy signal on line BN3033 is transmitted upward to the external device, which indicates that the message is not received by switch 3037. The external device then constructs another message E to inject into the next latch setting 3002 cycle. Alternatively, when the external signal E 3000 enters the unit 3092 from the input 3037 and no message reaches the line S 303 8, the message E passes the electronic optical switch 3054 to leave the unit on the upper layer and enter the control unit 3030 on the third layer. The occupancy signal on line BN 3033 indicates that the message to the external device is not received by the switch. In one embodiment, the layer 0 unit of the switch 3070 receives the optical control signal, which indicates that there is space in the output device for a message. In this embodiment, the cells of the 0th layer are the same as the cells 3030 of other layers. In another embodiment, the 0th level control unit of the switch receives an electronic control signal to indicate the output device. A message 200 cannot be received. In this embodiment, the unit of layer 0 is slightly different from the unit of layer 1. Among them, the optical fiber output 3038 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in the order-line ________-This paper standard applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 mm) 527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and the related 0 / E converter 4048 is replaced by a separate electronic connection. Figure 30E of the optical switch shows the optical fiber, control The interconnection structure of the unit and other components of the optical switch 3070. This figure is similar to Figure 17, in addition, the switch 3070 may have other rows (not shown). And not all rows must be equally spaced, so that in a pair of phases The length of the optical fiber 3086 between adjacent rows is not the same in all the rows. The message enters from the top 3072 and leaves from the bottom 3076. See also Figure 17. Messages moving to the right in a column can be dropped down preferentially or Continue to the right until the message reaches a control unit to allow the message to finally move downwards. Leave the control unit A 3030 and the optical signal M 3000 that preferentially moves to the right from line N 308 0 leaves cell A, where the line N is connected to the cell B on the line S 303 8 and above. The optical signal always leaves the cell B along the diagonal path 3082 from the line SE 3034. The cell B is connected to the line SE The following unit C goes down, so that unit C goes directly to the right of unit A. Obviously the purpose of the circular movement is that the message M can provide information immediately to block another message of unit B from moving preferentially from unit B to unit C. In the lower layer The message M takes precedence over the messages in the upper layers, as discussed in Figures 8A and 8B. In fact, the flow of messages, the sequence of movement, and the blocking that occurs in the optical switch 3070 and the electronic message 200 move through the same configured switch 1 The situation is the same for 700. The 3dD splitter of each control unit combines the small loss of optical energy of the optical fiber connectors 3066 and 3064 to cause the attenuation of the optical signal amplitude. To adjust the signal loss, the amplifier and regenerator 3090 are inserted between some rows The regenerator 3090 performs two functions: the optical signal 3000 is enlarged. Please read the precautions on the back first and then fill in the m thread. The paper size applies to Chinese national standards. CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 527798 A7 __B7 V. Invention description () The Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs prints sufficient strength for further processing, and changes or regenerates the binary information carried by the optical fiber to improve the signal And noise quality. In another embodiment using a semiconductor optical amplifier or lithium iron gate, the signal will be weakened by the system and needs to be regenerated. Message M can span more than one line at a given time. In fact, the message is in front of it The element can leave the switch after the message enters the switch after the message. In one embodiment of the switch 3070, the output line from the right is directly connected to the input line of the same layer on the left. In this embodiment, the entire message fits perfectly in one layer to ensure that the first bit of the message does not surround a row and collide with another part of the message. This feature can be applied to electronic and optical implementations. It should be noted that all messages are generally not the same length. The timing control of the switch 3070 enables the message to reach all units of a given layer and row at the same time. As an example for illustration, consider the embodiment of the 30E diagram with three rows, the four layers with the control unit, and the other layer with the output unit. The distance between the 0th line and the 1st line is equal to the distance between the 1st line and the 2nd line, but smaller than the distance between the 2nd line and the 0th line. The switch is designed to carry two lengths of messages, short message S and long message M. The output port 3085 on the right-hand side is directly connected to the input port 3083 in the same row. In addition, the short message S is suitable for two nodes in the same column. Therefore, for cell A in column R, W, and C, and cell B in column U, W, and C + 1, if the message moves from cell A to cell B, then At the time t when the first header bit of message S arrives at cell B, the last header bit of message S is already to the left of the node of cell A. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in, -ιτ line-:-^ 4- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 mm) 527798 A7 __B7 V. Description of the invention () Central of the Ministry of Economy Printed by the Standards Bureau Consumer Cooperative In another example, a message stays long enough at a given level to pass four nodes. A clock X is irregularly ticked and states 0, 1 and 2. Appear at a reference time t (0), the clock X starts and reads 0. The short message is inserted into the input unit of the first line at time 0 3 03 0. A short message is inserted into the switch of line 0 at time 0. The message does not deviate and has the first A header bit, which arrives at the unit on the first line and the third layer at time ^. The message S is still on the third layer and has the first header bit, which arrives on the second line at the time t2 Layer of the unit. The message S is still on the third layer and has the first header bit, which arrives at the unit of the third layer of the 0th row at time t3. A delay time D1 is defined as. A delay time D2 is defined as t3-t2 The clock X changes from state ZERO to state ONE at time D1, and 2 * D1 changes from state ONE at time D1 State TWO and change from state TWO to state ZERO at time 2 * D1 + D2. This period extends in this way, so that the clock X will change from state ZERO to state ONE at time 2 * D1 + D2. Use simple rules to insert messages To the switch. The clock changes to state t, and the short message is inserted into the input control unit in line t. If the short message can be inserted in the input control unit in line C at time t, then the long message can be inserted at time t + D 1 is inserted in the input control unit of line C. Therefore, the short message can be aligned and the long message can also be aligned. The rest of the switching timing depends on the fiber length and delay between the units. The length of the loop. The length of the optical fiber and the delay loop can be adjusted so that the message reaches a predetermined unit 3030 to the input ports NW3036 and S3 038, in this way the electronic can accurately operate the switch. The delay loop 3060 is made appropriately Size so that after the switch is switched, the message through this circuit will reach the electricity (please read the precautions on the back before filling the order line _92_ This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 mm) 527798 A7 ______ B7 V. Description of the invention () The sub-optical switches 3054 and 3056 are printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Finally, the delay loop 3068 is adjusted so that messages arriving from any port leave the unit at the same time. For hybrid electronic / optical control, please refer to Figure 29B. A master / slave relationship can effectively move data through a switch. A switch 2900 performs the control function, in which the master and slave implement the same topology and information circulation system so that the main part can be driven. Dependent part. The slave part acts passively based on the passage of the message. The flow of information between the master and the slave is functionally the same but different in timing. The timing difference can be adjusted to provide a successful master-slave embodiment of the switch 100. In particular, based on the purpose of the lowest possible latency of a message with a longer payload 206, benefits are obtained by controlling a fast and very high bandwidth optical switch with an electronic switch that only processes the message header. This hybrid electronic / optical combination helps to take advantage of the best features of both technologies to produce an ultra-low latency and very high bandwidth switch. Please refer to FIGS. 30A and 30B. An optical message 3000 has a longer dark time 3008 and a long header 3004, and includes a “fat” (longer period) optical bit 3002, which can be an optical / Electronic device processing. In other words, the 3010 portion of the payload of the optical message 3000 is a fraction of the entire message length. The wide header bit and dark time 3008 are necessary to consider the jitter in the optical timing. Avoiding the use of expensive high-speed detectors and electronic optical switches can reduce the cost of each control unit 3030. The time for the header and control processing is adjusted by the delay circuits 3060 and 3068, which are on the order of one meter in length. Furthermore, the ungenerated delay loop delay is repeated in each control unit. On the other hand, when entering the optical payload 3010 (please read the precautions on the back before filling and aligning; _____ 93- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 527798 A7 B7 Description of the invention () When the consumer cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economy reset all the latches 3046 in the switch 3070 before printing, no delay loop was used and the control units were arranged adjacent to each other. Reduce the flow time or latency of the optical payload through the switch. See Figures 30B and 31. The high-speed electronic optical converters 3048 and 3 062 of the control unit 3030 are expensive and suitable for quickly switching electroabsorption tuners. High. An optical slave unit 3100 removes these two E / 0 converters and uses a low-speed electronic optical switch 3124. The unit 3100 is one level lower in cost and one level higher in speed. Electronic switches with the same topology and information flow only process Message header including communication bit 202 and column header 204. Because there is no payload to handle, no information is used in the electronic switch Output port 154. Using the fast logic described in the discussion of Figure 16B, after the last header bit has entered the switch, all latches of the established electronic switch 1620 are set to a clock cycle. For example, it is executed at 500 Hz The 10th layer switch with 11 header bits uses about 20 nanoseconds to set the latch 3 1 1 6. Please refer to the split header switch in Figure 29B and use high-speed technology to reduce the set time to 10 nanometers Seconds. While the header bit moves down through the electronic switch, the state of each latch 1616 is externally copied to the optical slave unit 3100. It should be noted that because of the The sequence is set from left to right, so the setting of one or more columns is transmitted by a single output pin 3114. A timing strobe signal 3110 for each control array including each column and row crossing is used to generate Latch status signal and copy the signal 3 1 24 to the optical slave unit latch 3 1 28. Latch (Please read the precautions on the back before filling ^ page)
、1T 線 ---94- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明() (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫- 鎖3128設定電子光學開關3130或3132爲透明的及另一 個爲非透明的。在光學有效載荷到達之前,電子光學開關 3 130或3 132具有足夠的時間改變狀態,所以可使用較低 廉之裝置。 、言 請參閱第32圖,在混合電子/光學開關3200之一實施 例中,用於第1 7圖之相同佈局規則用於電子和光學部份。 爲考量時序上的差異,電子標頭先進入該電子開關並且傳 輸該閂鎖狀態至光學部份3 1 00。當所有閂鎖被設置時, 傳送光學有效載荷通過,且因爲除了延遲迴路3060和3 068 之外的光纖非常短,所以該有效載荷在移動通過非常短的 總路徑長度之後離開。若使用再生,則加入額外路徑長度。 只要該光學有效載荷之尾端已進入光學部份之頂層,則新 電子標頭馬上傳送至電子部份。依據每個部份之相對潛候 期,可預期電子和光學的處理有一些重疊,因而減少訊息 進入較快部份之間的停頓時間。 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 請參閱第31和32圖,其顯示控制流通之互連方式, 用於衍生自第17圖之開關1700之混合電子/光學開關3200 兩層和兩行。沿電子部份之每列之閂鎖設定d 3 1 06藉由 控制線3114傳送至在光學部份之可能位置的閂鎖3100。 使用時序閃光3112自一輸出接腳多重化閂鎖設置。 當電子主要部份之=的時序同步化有別於光學從屬部 份的時序時,可使用緩衝器以儲存電子所提供之開關設 定,直至該光學從屬部份需要該設定爲止。與每個光學單 元有關的是具有兩個隔間A和B之兩個長位移暫存器。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 527798 A7 B7 五、發明説明( 經濟部中央標隼局員工消費合作社印製 該光學主要部份傳送資料至隔間A。若隔間B爲空的, 則位元由隔間A流至隔間B。當光學單元已爲資料準備 好,該光學單元自隔間B獲得資料。 在此討論三種不同之應用。 第一種應用討論之情況爲只有一訊息位元適合於光學 開關之最短列。當至開關之一輸入裝置傳送資料至目標 時,該裝置注入標頭於電子主開關中。因爲阻擋情況,所 以該裝置必須等候注入資料。當標頭之第一個位元一被電 子主要部份所接收,則該光學訊息立刻沿閘極設置而建 構。當該光學訊息進入該開關陣列時,設定所有開關。在 訊息通過該開關陣列的同時,其他訊息在注入之前自電子 形式轉換成光學形式。也再生另外之其他訊息。另外之其 他訊息離開該開關且自光學形式轉換成電子形式。因此, 通過光學開關之所有時間完全爲同時處理過程所隱藏。 第二種應用利用平行電子複製,且當幾個訊息佔據光 學開關之一層的單列時使用。可使用閂鎖設置之額外緩 衝。在開關之第二種形式,光學開關之每列包含K個訊 息。該光學開關不能執行蟲蛀孔方式。該光學開關包含K 行。電路之電子部份包括光學開關的K個電子副本。每 個副本以蟲蛀孔方式執行。在該光學開關的行標示爲CQ, C! ’…,Cw。該電子開關標示爲N。,K,…,N ^。在 時間〇,該電子開關η傳送資料至一個光學開關的光學行 η。在時間t,該電子開關η傳送.資料至光學開關t+n mod K。該閂鎖設置可使用緩衝。 請 先 閱 讀 背 面 之 注 意 事 項 再 訂 線 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 79 27 5 A7 _____B7五、發明説明() 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 第三種應用支援在光學開關之每層的幾個訊息。使用 蟲蛀孔發送方式和在開關中使用緩衝以符合時序需要。該 開關包括K個電子開關之副本NQ,K,…,Ν η以及一 個具有Κ行C。,q,…,之光學開關。電子開關Nj 具有一組兩個長緩衝器,其與光學開關之每個單元相連 結。在每個電子開關中發生標頭之蟲蛀孔發送方式。在時 間〇,開關N。開始處理標頭和傳送開關設置至光學單元。 在時間D,開關小開始處理標頭和傳送開關設置至光學 單元。一般來說,在時間JD,開關N;開始處理資料及傳 送設定至光學開關。每當電子開關開始處理標頭時,光學 訊息開始結構的處理。在時間K ( D+ 1 ),與電子開關N, 有關之光學訊息被放出,且當資料波被傳送通過該光學開 關時此過程將持續。 本案之實施例已詳加描述,以上所描述不應用來加以 限定本案之申請專利範圍。本案得由熟悉本技藝之人士任 施匠思而爲諸般修飾,然皆不脫如附申請專利範圍所欲保 護者。再者,該開關以”向左”,”向右”,”向上”和”向 下”之方向名詞作描述,所包含之名詞只爲與圖示說明之 實施例一致起見,無暗示實際的方向性。此外,許多不同 形式之裝置可連接,其使用之互連結構包括但不限於工作 站,電腦,終端機,ATM開關,電話中央辦公室設備, 乙太網路和IP開關等等。 此描述及申請專利範圍有時意指以多重次元排列之一 互連結構。此所舉之方向有助於瞭解互連結構的型態然 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫·、 1T line --- 94- This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) 527798 A7 B7 V. Description of invention () (Please read the precautions on the back before filling-Lock 3128 setting electronic optics The switch 3130 or 3132 is transparent and the other is non-transparent. The electro-optical switch 3 130 or 3 132 has enough time to change the state before the optical payload arrives, so a cheaper device can be used. Figure 32. In one embodiment of the hybrid electronic / optical switch 3200, the same layout rules used in Figure 17 are used for the electronic and optical parts. In order to consider the difference in timing, the electronic header first enters the electronic switch and Transmit the latched state to the optical part 3 1 00. When all the latches are set, the transmitting optical payload passes, and because the optical fibers other than the delay loops 3060 and 3 068 are very short, the payload is moving through Very short total path length to leave after. If regeneration is used, add additional path length. As long as the trailing end of the optical payload has entered the top layer of the optical section, then The new electronic header is immediately transmitted to the electronic part. Based on the relative latency of each part, it is expected that there will be some overlap in the electronic and optical processing, thus reducing the pause time between messages entering the faster part. Printed by the Bureau of Standards Consumer Cooperatives, please refer to Figures 31 and 32, which show the interconnected way of controlling circulation, for two layers and two rows of hybrid electronic / optical switches 3200 derived from switch 1700 of Figure 17. Along the electronics department The latch setting d 3 1 06 of each row is transmitted through the control line 3114 to the latch 3100 in the possible position of the optical part. Using the timing flash 3112, the latch setting is multiplexed from one output pin. When the electronic main part When the timing synchronization of the part = is different from the timing of the optical slave part, a buffer can be used to store the switch settings provided by the electronics until the optical slave part needs the setting. What is related to each optical unit is Two long displacement registers with two compartments A and B. This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm) 527798 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (in the Ministry of Economic Affairs The CCB employee consumer cooperative prints the main part of the optics to send data to compartment A. If compartment B is empty, the bits flow from compartment A to compartment B. When the optical unit is ready for the data The optical unit obtains data from compartment B. Three different applications are discussed here. The first application discusses the situation where only one message bit is suitable for the shortest row of an optical switch. When one of the input devices to the switch transmits data to When aiming, the device injects the header into the electronic main switch. Because of the blocking condition, the device must wait for the data to be injected. When the first bit of the header is received by the electronic main part, the optical message immediately follows The gate is set and constructed. When the optical message enters the switch array, all switches are set. As messages pass through the switch array, other messages are converted from electronic to optical form before being injected. Also reproduces other messages. Other messages leave the switch and convert from optical to electronic form. Therefore, all the time through the optical switch is completely hidden by the simultaneous processing. The second application utilizes parallel electronic replication and is used when several messages occupy a single column of one layer of the optical switch. An extra buffer can be used for the latch setting. In the second form of the switch, each column of the optical switch contains K messages. This optical switch cannot perform the moth hole method. The optical switch contains K lines. The electronic part of the circuit includes K electronic copies of the optical switch. Each copy is executed as a wormhole. The rows of the optical switch are labeled CQ, C! '..., Cw. The electronic switch is labeled N. , K, ..., N ^. At time 0, the electronic switch n transmits data to the optical line n of an optical switch. At time t, the electronic switch n transmits data to the optical switch t + n mod K. This latch setting enables buffering. Please read the precautions on the back before ordering. The paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm) 79 27 5 A7 _____B7 V. Description of the invention The application supports several messages on each layer of the optical switch. Use wormhole sending methods and buffering in switches to meet timing needs. The switch includes copies of K electronic switches NQ, K, ..., N η and a row C with K. , Q, ..., optical switches. The electronic switch Nj has a set of two long buffers which are connected to each unit of the optical switch. A wormhole transmission method of a header occurs in each electronic switch. At time 0, switch N. Start processing the header and transfer switch set to the optical unit. At time D, the switcher starts processing the header and the transfer switch is set to the optical unit. Generally, at time JD, switch N; starts processing data and transmitting settings to the optical switch. Whenever the electronic switch starts processing the header, the optical message starts processing the structure. At time K (D + 1), the optical information related to electronic switch N, is released, and this process will continue when a data wave is transmitted through the optical switch. The examples in this case have been described in detail, and the above description should not be used to limit the scope of patent application in this case. This case may be modified by anyone who is familiar with the art, but it is not inferior to those who want to protect the scope of the patent application. In addition, the switch is described in terms of “leftward”, “rightward”, “upward” and “downward” directions, and the terms included are only for consistency with the illustrated embodiments, and do not imply actuality. Directionality. In addition, many different types of devices can be connected, and the interconnection structures used include, but are not limited to, workstations, computers, terminals, ATM switches, telephone central office equipment, Ethernet and IP switches, and so on. This description and the scope of patent applications sometimes mean an interconnect structure in a multidimensional arrangement. This direction is helpful to understand the shape of the interconnect structure (Please read the notes on the back before filling in.
、1T 線 -^- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐)、 1T line-^-This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm)
Claims (1)
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US09/009,703 US6289021B1 (en) | 1997-01-24 | 1998-01-20 | Scaleable low-latency switch for usage in an interconnect structure |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
TW527798B true TW527798B (en) | 2003-04-11 |
Family
ID=21739229
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
TW087112178A TW527798B (en) | 1998-01-20 | 1998-07-27 | A scaleable low-latency switch for usage in an interconnect structure |
Country Status (3)
Country | Link |
---|---|
HU (1) | HUP0001273A3 (en) |
MY (1) | MY128737A (en) |
TW (1) | TW527798B (en) |
Cited By (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
TWI575940B (en) * | 2012-04-13 | 2017-03-21 | Ge影像壓縮有限公司 | Scalable data stream and network entity |
US9973781B2 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2018-05-15 | Ge Video Compression, Llc | Video data stream concept |
-
1998
- 1998-01-22 HU HU0001273A patent/HUP0001273A3/en unknown
- 1998-07-27 TW TW087112178A patent/TW527798B/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1998-07-29 MY MYPI98003460A patent/MY128737A/en unknown
Cited By (17)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US11343517B2 (en) | 2012-04-13 | 2022-05-24 | Ge Video Compression, Llc | Low delay picture coding |
US11259034B2 (en) | 2012-04-13 | 2022-02-22 | Ge Video Compression, Llc | Scalable data stream and network entity |
US10045017B2 (en) | 2012-04-13 | 2018-08-07 | Ge Video Compression, Llc | Scalable data stream and network entity |
US10123006B2 (en) | 2012-04-13 | 2018-11-06 | Ge Video Compression, Llc | Low delay picture coding |
US20190045201A1 (en) | 2012-04-13 | 2019-02-07 | Ge Video Compression, Llc | Low delay picture coding |
US12192492B2 (en) | 2012-04-13 | 2025-01-07 | Ge Video Compression, Llc | Low delay picture coding |
US10674164B2 (en) | 2012-04-13 | 2020-06-02 | Ge Video Compression, Llc | Low delay picture coding |
US10694198B2 (en) | 2012-04-13 | 2020-06-23 | Ge Video Compression, Llc | Scalable data stream and network entity |
US11876985B2 (en) | 2012-04-13 | 2024-01-16 | Ge Video Compression, Llc | Scalable data stream and network entity |
US11122278B2 (en) | 2012-04-13 | 2021-09-14 | Ge Video Compression, Llc | Low delay picture coding |
TWI575940B (en) * | 2012-04-13 | 2017-03-21 | Ge影像壓縮有限公司 | Scalable data stream and network entity |
US11025958B2 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2021-06-01 | Ge Video Compression, Llc | Video data stream concept |
US10743030B2 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2020-08-11 | Ge Video Compression, Llc | Video data stream concept |
US11856229B2 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2023-12-26 | Ge Video Compression, Llc | Video data stream concept |
US9973781B2 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2018-05-15 | Ge Video Compression, Llc | Video data stream concept |
US11956472B2 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2024-04-09 | Ge Video Compression, Llc | Video data stream concept |
US10484716B2 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2019-11-19 | Ge Video Compression, Llc | Video data stream concept |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
HUP0001273A3 (en) | 2000-09-28 |
MY128737A (en) | 2007-02-28 |
HUP0001273A2 (en) | 2000-07-28 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
AU744578B2 (en) | A scalable low-latency switch for usage in an interconnect structure | |
US6754207B1 (en) | Multiple-path wormhole interconnect | |
KR20040032880A (en) | Scalable switching system with intelligent control | |
CN105917606A (en) | System and method for photonic networks | |
WO2016180340A1 (en) | System and method for photonic switching | |
US6674971B1 (en) | Optical communication network with receiver reserved channel | |
TW527798B (en) | A scaleable low-latency switch for usage in an interconnect structure | |
EP1730987B1 (en) | Highly parallel switching systems utilizing error correction ii | |
JP4613296B2 (en) | A scalable multipath wormhole interconnect network. | |
CA3123224C (en) | Method and apparatus for improved data transfer between processor cores | |
Yang et al. | Design of scalable and multicast capable cut-through switches for high-speed LANs | |
MXPA99006982A (en) | A scalable low-latency switch for usage in an interconnect structure | |
Yang et al. | A Non-blocking Network Design for Terabit Capacity Optical Interconnects | |
Yan | Crossbar architectures for broadband switching | |
CN116349208A (en) | Routing method and data forwarding system | |
Kabacinski et al. | Simultaneous connections routing in multi-log/sub 2/N switching fabrics | |
Nitta et al. | On-Chip Photonic Networks | |
CZ9902613A3 (en) | Adaptive changeover switch with short waiting time used in interconnecting structures | |
Dress | Optical interconnect for large-scale systems |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
GD4A | Issue of patent certificate for granted invention patent | ||
MM4A | Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees |